Home

DC 6140L/6240L - Triumph Adler

Contents

1. 3 Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet IMPORTANT Only use the power cable that comes with the machine 2 5 Preparation before Use Power On Off Power On When the main power indicator is lit Press the Power key Power i When the main power indicator is off Turn the main power switch on IMPORTANT When turning off the main power switch do not turn on the main power switch again immediately Wait more than 5 seconds and then turn on the main power switch 2 6 Preparation before Use Power Off Before turning off the main power switch press the Power key on the operation panel to off Make sure that the memory indicator is off before turning off the main power switch LIEW Print Send Receive Memory Attention Make sure that the indicator is off In case of not using the machine for a extended period of time CAUTION If this machine will be left unused for an extended period e g overnight turn it off at the main power switch If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time e g vacation remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution If using the products equipped with the fax function note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception CAUTION Remov
2. Numeric keys Enter Ends operation numbers and symbols logs out on the Administration screen Returns the Message Display to the Used to register or recall previous screen programs Lights or blinks when an error occurs Cancels the printing job in progress Blinks while the machine is accessing the memory Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations Machine Platen O ON Oa Ph WD oma lt 11 Slit Glass Operation Panel Part Names ae ya _ N AY A NN W W WN N N NN ANN N N Top Cover Front Cover Toner Container Lock Lever Toner Container Developer Unit USB Memory Slot Paper Guage Duplexer Front Cover 1 4 12 13 14 15 16 Part Names N 19 NN a NN N WW CO N i a E a Vaen T Z a WW A L Ls AY DAT aes A o AE Sr Ze Cf Va 15 22 Document Processor Inner Tray Paper Length Guide Paper Width Guide Paper Width Adjusting Tab 17 Paper Size Dial 18 Cassette 1 19 Paper Width Guides 20 Multi Purpose Tray MP tray 21 Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose Tray 22 Handholds 24 X SX 23 SX ZN Z 25 SX 25 23 Rear Unit 24 Fuser Cover 25 Envelope Switch 26 27 28 29 30 31
3. 3 30 4 Copying Functions This chapter explains the functions available for copying s Ogna SIZC tito coesi ore OE 4 2 Paper SEClCCION csadeoccasicamarnaansiisds EEEo 4 3 JONGiNalOneEMtallOn ucssecssces ass cea a ens a eaten aunties 4 6 e ECOFIN saa cecataecare tte sadeceitet aus eacebdanadiiceat a S 4 8 COMMDING INIOG Cie cesta ie aren a amiga aedes 4 9 COMINUOUS SCAN encen e EA a 4 13 aJODdr MIST INOUG Ciao iene Sonecet aoe d igi le eect a ete tele se oe Nenana 4 14 SIRO IN GINA ENUY Ssste settee cites annS iota ge nectead saseeSasenaianceeamanicnwengadaancealeeuseendee 4 16 APRING OVENS es seme ites arate satel centile peendgaaeeaevanieerseeeaee 4 17 4 1 Copying Functions Original Size Specify the size of originals being scanned Be sure to select the original size before starting the copying process The following options are available Original Letter Legal Statement Executive Officio Il A4 A5 Sizes A6 B5 B6 Folio 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 and Custom For instructions on how to specify the custom original size refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8 7 Use the procedure below to select the original size 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Collate Duplex 4 Press the A or V key to sel
4. 2 Open the left cover of the document processor 3 Remove the jammed original If the original is caught in the rollers or difficult to remove proceed to the next step 4 Open the document processor 5 Remove the jammed original If the original tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine A S As Py gt 6 Close the document processor 7 Place the originals 10 18 11 Management This chapter explains the following operations e User Login Administration ccccccceceeeseeeeeeeeees 11 2 s JODACCOUNUINO reset es tesiaesctnt iia e a 11 15 e Checking the Countel ccccccccseceeeeeceeeeeeeeneeees 11 37 Management User Login Administration User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine Enter correct login user name and password for user authentication to log in Access are in three levels User Administrator and Machine Administrator The security levels can be modified only by the machine administrator First User Login Administration Follow these steps for the first user login administration Enable user login administration page 11 2 Vv Add a user page 11 6 Vv Log out page 11 5 vy The registered user logs in for operations page 11 5 Enabling Disabling User Login Administration This enables user login administration Select one of the following authentication methods D a Local User authentication bas
5. 7 Triumph Adler SIMPLIFY YOUR BURO DC 6140L 6240L User Manual 000 DC 6140L 6240L Digital Multifunctional Systems Copy Print Scan Fax A4 Introduction Thank you for your purchase of this model This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary so that you can always use the machine in good condition Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine and keep it close to the machine for easy reference We recommend the use of our own brand supplies We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine Included Guides The following guides are supplied with the machine Refer to them as necessary Quick Installation Guide Describes frequently used operations convenient operations routine maintenance and troubleshooting action Safety Guide Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine Be sure to read this guide before using the machine Safety Guide for this machine only Describes the machine installation space cautionary labels and other information Be sure to read this guide before using the machine DVD ROM Product Library Operation Guide This Guide Describes how to load paper basic copy print and scan operations and troubleshooting FAX Operation Guide Describes h
6. An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots e g 192 168 110 171 Each number should be between 0 and 255 IPP IPP Internet Printing Protocol is a standard that uses TCP IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers IPP is an extension of the HT TP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations It also supports the HT TP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption KPDL Kyocera Page Description Language Kyocera s PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3 Multi Purpose MP Tray Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes Hagaki transparencies or labels NetBEUI NetBIOS Extended User Interface An interface developed by IBM in 1985 as an update from NetBIOS It enables more advanced functions on smaller lt networks than other protocols such as TCP IP etc It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS 2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services NetWare Novell s network management software
7. Maintenance Toner Container Replacement When the message display displays Add toner replace the toner Every time you replace the toner container be sure to clean the parts as instructed below Dirty parts may deteriorate output quality CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box Dangerous sparks may cause burns Toner Container Replacement NOTE You do not have to turn machine power off before starting the replacement Any data that may be processing in the machine will be deleted if you turn the machine power off 1 Open the top cover and front cover UIA ANI AIT 2 Push toner container lock lever to the right and pull out the toner container ib Al TA W Tl D 4 3 Put the old toner container in the plastic bag contained in the toner kit and discard it later according to the local code or regulations for waste disposal 4 Take the new toner container out of the toner kit 9 5 Maintenance 5 Shake the new toner container at least 10 times as shown in the figure in order to distribute the toner evenly inside the container 6 Remove the label from the toner container 7 Set the new toner container in the machine and push down on the top of the toner container to install it firmly in place as shown at the left 8 Close the top cover and front cover Proceed to the next section NOTE Return the exhaust
8. The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set User Job Account gt User Login Set Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit 5 Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears Job Account Set lt Each Job Account Account List Default Setting Exit 6 Press the A or V key to select Each Job Account 11 33 Fach Job Account gt QJ eeGUI DESIGN eeRD Center eel R amp D DEPT GUL DESIGN Printed Pages Scanned Pages FAX TX Pages Exit FAX TX Pages a 0 FAX 1 3 1234567 Limit 1234567 GUI DESIGN Printed Pages Scanned Pages Reset counter Are you sure eGUI DESIGN Yes 10 11 12 13 14 Management Press the OK key The Each Job Accounting menu appears Press the A or V key to select the account of which you want to check counts Press the OK key A menu for the account appears Press the A or V key to select the function of which you want to check counts and then press the OK key If you select Printed Pages select the item for which you want to check printed page counts and then press the OK key Press the lt or gt key to switch the counted items If you select Scanned Pages press the lt or gt key to switch the counted items If the number of output sheets is restricted by an account management function the upper limit on the number of output sheets is also displa
9. When KPDL Is Selected for Emulation When you use the KPDL emulation mode set whether or not to output KPDL error reports The default setting is Off Use the procedure below to make the setting 1 In Emulation Set press the A or V key to select KPDL Emulation Set PCL6 KPDL Auto 2 Press the OK key KPDL Error Rpt appears KPDL Error Rpt 3 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 4 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu When KPDL Auto Is Selected for Emulation If you use the KPDL Auto emulation mode KPDL and another emulation mode can be automatically switched according to the data alternative emulation For alternative emulation you can select one of the following printers The default setting is PCL6 Line Printer IBM Proprinter DIABLO 630 EPSON LQ 850 PCL6 Also aS when you select KPDL set whether or not to output KPDL error reports The default setting is Off Use the procedure below to make the setting 1 In Emulation Set press the A or V key to select Emulation Set V KPDL Auto PCL6 KPDL KPDL Auto 8 76 Default Setting System Menu 2 Press the OK key Alt Emulation appears Alt Emulation DIABLO 630 EPSON LQ 850 3 Press the A or V key to select the printer for alternative emulation 4 Press the OK key KPDL Error Rpt appears KPDL Error Rpt 5 Press the A or V key to select Off or On
10. page 8 14 Media Type Set page 8 16 Media for Auto page 8 19 Def PaperSource page 8 20 SpcialPaper Act page 8 21 Preset Limit page 8 23 Measurement page 8 24 Error Handling page 8 25 eos Sir cane page 8 27 eons Err Clear Timer page 8 32 Sleep Tamer page 8 34 PanelReset Timer page 8 37 Low Power Timer page 8 39 Auto Err Clear page 8 32 Auto Sleep page 8 34 Continued on Auto Panel Reset page 8 37 next page Continued on next page Unusable Time page 8 40 xii System Menu Common Counter key Continued from Continued trom previous page Previous page OE SEE Color Selection page 8 42 Default eyes m FAX Resolution Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Detail Setting page 8 57 page 8 58 _ page 8 60 page 8 61 page 8 62 page 8 63 page 8 64 since aa Continued on a e Hi es 22 2 a Settings xiii Counter key Continued from previous page EcoPrint page 8 77 Override A4 LTR page 8 78 Duplex page 8 79 Copies page 8 80 Orientation page 8 81 FormFeed TimeOut page 8 82 LF Action page 8 82 CR Action page 8 83 Paper erood sa lode page 8 84 salad Document Box Sub Address Box Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Sob Box Box page 8 88 Oo Box Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Selec Ke7 Seite page 8 90 Edit Address Book page 8 105 Destination PENES EGE
11. 2 41 10 3 Troubleshooting Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions wea Cannot print Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC outlet TO Is the machine powered on Turn on the main power switch 2 26 Is the printer cable Connect the correct printer cable Ca N 5 connected securely Was the machine powered Power on the machine after on before the printer cable connecting the printer cable was connected Is the print job paused Press Resume the Left Select 7 18 key to resume printing Is the error message Follow the corresponding 10 6 displayed procedure Documents are Are the application software Check that the printing system printed improperly settings at the PC set driver and application software properly settings are set properly Cannot print with USB Is the USB host blocked Select Unblock in the USB host 8 146 memory settings Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine When displaying an Have you selected Select a scan resolution other than 5 image sent from the 200x100dpi Normal or 200x100dpi Normal or 200x400dpi machine onthe PC an 200x400dpi Super Fine for Super Fine when sending an image size is shrunk the scan resolution image vertically or horizontally USB memory not Check that the USB memory is recognized securely plugged into the machine Is the USB host blocked Select Unblock in the USB host 8 146 settings Vertical
12. 3 Double click the DVD ROM icon 2 19 Preparation before Use 4 Double click either OS X 10 2 and 10 3 Only OS X 10 4 Only or OS X 10 5 or higher depending on your Mac OS version ane z gq me j 2m 2 a DEVICES SHARED l me a gt PLACES ce j am gt SEARCH FOR Common files Document OS X 10 2 and 10 3 Only i PoF E l ce l ca Pe s t oasa OS X 10 4 Only OS X 10 5 or higher Readme pdf x 6 items Zero KB available a pe 7 5 Double click Brand Name OS X x x s k OSX 10 5 or higher oo 7a gt DEVICES w o gt SHARED a mmmssiOS X 10 5 build gt PLACES PDL Setup 0 gt SEARCH FOR 2 items Zero KB available 6 The printing system driver installation program starts up 0 oil a E E Welcome to the I UUL BE Introduction Read Me You will be guided through the steps necessary to install this software License Destination Select Installation Type Installation Summary Go Back Continue 7 Choose Select Destination Installation Type and then install the printing system driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software 2 20 Preparation before Use NOTE In addition to Easy Install the Installation Type options include Custom Install which allows you to specify the components to be installed IMPORTANT In the Authenticate screen enter the name and password use
13. 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 Part Names 29 30 31 Top Cover Original Width Guides Original Table Original Eject Table Original Stopper Document Processor Open Close Handle USB interface Connector Network Interface Connector indicators LINE Connector TEL Connector Rear Cover Power Cord Connector Main Power Switch Handholes Left Cover Waste Toner Box Only on products with the fax function installed 1 6 2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well as the procedures for loading papers and originals Check bundled iteMs ccccccceccceeceeeeseeeseeeseneeneeees 2 2 e Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables 2 3 CONMECING CADICS er AEA 2 5 e Power OMNn OM ics eves cnsececesctscanscecceadcnedodensuenseccgsaszeayauace 2 6 e Auto Low Power Mod ccccceccceeceseceseeeeeeeeeneees 2 8 lt Sleep and Auto SICEDP cc ccccecceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 2 8 e Switching the Language for Display Language 2 9 e Setting Date and TiMe cece ccccceeeceeeeeeeseeeeaes 2 11 e Network Setup LAN Cable Connection 2 14 ANSTAINING SONW ANC oso sa wsencrecusie mde cremedetinedue si srcetecies 2 16 e Embedded Web Server Settings for E mail 2 28 e Sending E Mail cece ecccececeeeceeeceeeseeeseeesee
14. 40667643277 Msally ttttt tk tit FH Ntid7004 Menu 8 Press the A or V key to select the sending address 9 Press the OK key The selected destination is added to the group and the screen returns to Group Member NOTE If you select an individual destination that has already been registered to the group the screen will display This address is already registered and return to the screen of step 7 Deleting member from group To delete a member registered to the group follow the procedure below 1 While Group Member is displayed press Edit the Group Member v Right Select key This displays the list of destinations registered to the group GMorgan Morgan 2 Press the A or V key to select the destination you want to delete 3 Press Menu the Right Select key The group editing Menu v menu appears Detail add Member 4 Press the A or V key to select Delete 8 113 Default Setting System Menu 5 Press the OK key A confirmation message appears Delete Are you sure MSally Yes 6 Press Yes the Left Select key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to Group Member Entering Address Number Address Number is an ID for a destination When creating a new destination the smallest unused address number is automatically allocated You can select any available number out of 100 numbers for individuals and 20 numbers for groups l 1 Press the lt or
15. 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the 8 screen returns to the Printer menu EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count V select Printer Common Settings Copy Printer 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR EXit Press the A or V key to select EcoPrint 4 Press the OK key EcoPrint appears EcoPrint 5 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 77 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu Override A4 LTR Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter which are similar in size as the same size when printing The table below shows the available settings ee eee A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size The machine will use whichever size is in the paper source A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size Use the procedure below to specify the override A4 Letter setting The default setting is On 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Printer Common Settings Copy Printer 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer Emulation Set Ec
16. Close the flap Return postcard Cardstock Portrait form Landscape form Oufuku Hagaki Hagaki envelopes envelopes NOTE Use unfolded return postcard Oufuku Hagaki IMPORTANT How to load envelopes orientation and facing will differ depending on the type of envelope Be sure to load it in correctly otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face NOTE When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray select the envelope type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 57 2 48 Preparation before Use Specifying Paper Size and Media The default paper size setting for cassette for multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder cassettes 2 to 4 is Letter and the default media type setting is Plain To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes specify the paper size and media type setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2 49 To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray specify the paper size setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 57 Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes To fix the type of paper to be used in cassette or the optional paper feeder cassettes 2 to 4 specify the paper size Also you use a media type other than plain paper specify the media type setting Selection Item Selectable
17. End Time Wed 27 Apr 2005 14 56 08 File Name doc2 7042005145608 Job Type 00 cO ee d0 01 14 Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Collate Duplex 4 Press the A or V key to select JobFinish Notice Press the OK key JobFinish Notice appears JobFinish Notice Mm 6 Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key 4 14 Copying Functions A 7 Press the A or V key to select Address Book or Destination Address Entry and then press the OK key 0i address Book Address Entry 8 Ifyou select Address Book select Address Book on Address Book the next screen and press the OK key and then select A the notice destination Maury Morgan Press Menu the Right Select key select Detail on the next screen and press the OK key to view the details of the selected notice destination If you select Address Entry enter the address of the Address Entry oad OK notice destination kkkkkK a abcdefg jp NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for ABC details on entering characters Text 9 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying 10 Press the Start key to start copying Upon completion of the job an E mail notice is sent to the selected destination
18. In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Printer Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Press the A or V key to select Copies Press the OK key Copies appears Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to set the default number of copies Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu 8 80 Default Setting System Menu Orientation Set the default orientation Portrait or Landscape Portrait Landscape Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count V select Printer Common Settings Copy Printer 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR EXit Press the A or V key to select Orientation 4 Press the OK key Orientation appears Orientation gt 0m Ol Portrait Landscape 5 Press the A or V key to select Portrait or Landscape 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu 8 81 Default Setting System Menu FormFeed Timeout Receiving print data from the computer the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signalling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically prints paper The options are between 5 and 495 seconds Use the procedure
19. NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu Copying Functions File Name Entry Names a copy job Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary You can check a job history or job status using the job name date and time or job number specified here Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu Sad OK Paper Selection O Collate Duplex 4 Press the A or V key to select File Name Entry Press the OK key File Name Entry appears File Name Entry J doch 6 Enter the file name press the OK key Additional Info appears NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 7 Enter the date job number etc on the screen and then press the OK key NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying 8 Press the Start key to start copying NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu Copying Functions Print Override This function allows you to suspend the current print job when you need to make copies immediately When the interrupt copy job is completed the machine resumes the suspended print job 1 Press the Function Menu key Function Men
20. User Job Account gt M User Login Set Job Account set Unknown ID Job EXit Job Account Set lt Mm El Job Accounting Account Report Total Accounting EXit Print Are you sure Total JobAccounting Yes Management 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set 5 Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears 6 Press the A or V key to select Account Report and then press the OK key 7 Inthe confirmation screen press Yes the Left Select key A job accounting report is printed 11 36 Management Checking the Counter You can check the number of pages printed and scanned The number is counted by the following items ee Printed By Function You can check the number of pages copied Pages faxed and printed and the total number of pages used By Paper You can check the number of pages printed Size for each paper size Scanned Pages You can check the number of pages copied faxed and otherwise scanned and the total number of pages used Only on products with the fax function installed 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter 2 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Counter and then press the OK key Report System 3 Press the A or V key to select Printed Pages or Scanned Pages and then press the OK key Printed Pages Scann
21. User Job Account 05 Common Settings Common Settings 0l Language Default Screen Sound Exit Login User Name Login Password Login In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Timer Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key 8 40 Timer Setting gt 0m Err Clear Timer Sleep Timer PanelReset Timer Exit Start Time ad OK Hour Min MIM 00 Current Time 11 45 End Time a OK Hour Min MIM 00 Current Time 11 45 Unlock Code aid OK 0000 9999 0000 Default Setting System Menu 4 The Timer Settings menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select Unusable Time 6 Press the OK key Unusable Time appears 7 Press the A or V key to select On 8 Press the OK key Start Time appears 9 Press the A or V key to set the Start Time 10 Press the OK key End Time appears 11 Press the A or V key to set the End Time 12 Press the OK key Unlock Code appears 13 Press the A or V key or numeric keys to set the unlock code 14 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu 8 41 Function Defaults Default Setting System Menu Defaults ar
22. page 8 105 Adjust Maint Copy Densi Ad page 8 98 page 8 99 page 8 100 Service page 8 95 page 8 95 page 8 101 page 8 102 page 8 103 s E Remote Diag Set Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Remote Diag Refer to the FAX Operation Guide XIV Environment The service environmental conditions are as follows e Temperature 50 to 90 5 F 10 to 32 5 C e Humidity 15 to 80 However adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine e Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight e Avoid locations with vibrations e Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations e Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air e Avoid poorly ventilated locations If the floor is delicate against casters when this machine is moved after installation the floor material may be damaged During copying some ozone is released but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one s health If however the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies the smell may become unpleasant To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated Cautions when handling consumables A CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner
23. 11 25 Management Applying Limit of Restriction This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction The table below describes the action taken eae Immediately Job stops when the counter reaches its limit Subsequently Printing scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be rejected Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter O Sys Menu Count gt 0 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key Login Password l NOTE The User Job Account menu appears Refer to Login Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 3 The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set User Job Account gt User Login Set Job Account set Unknown ID Job Exit 5 Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears Job Account Set lt m Each Job Account Account List Default Setting 11 26 Default Settin
24. 21 use the Hostname port number format E g FTPhostname 140 1 Press the lt or gt key to display Folder SMB or Detail Folder FTP Folder SMB Ntida7004 2 Press Edit the Right Select key An entry screen Host Name SMB z appears RD Centeri 3 Enter the host name Host Name FTP NOTE Destination can be specified using the Address RD Centeri Book or the One touch keys Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 26 Enclose the IPv6 address in brackets 4 Press the OK key Path appears Path RD3 reporth 8 108 Login User Name Mauryi Login Password TI tii iii ty Check the connection Are you sure Dest Confirm 2 MMorgan tHE HF 410667640000 40667741234 Exit Default Setting System Menu 5 Enter the path name 6 Press the OK key Login User Name appears 7 Enter the login user name 8 Press the OK key Login Password appears 9 Enter the login password 10 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears 8 NOTE If the screen for confirming the entry of a new destination page 8 88 is set to On screens to confirm the entered host name and path name appear Enter the same host name and path name again and press the OK key on their respective screens 11 Press Yes the Left Select key This makes a connection with the entered destination If the connection is successful Connected is displayed on the
25. EcoPrint Press the OK key EcoPrint appears EcoPrint 6 Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying 7 Press the Start key to start copying NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 8 Copying Functions Combine Mode This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page 2 in 1 mode or 4 in 1 mode The page boundary of each original can be indicated NOTE Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Folio A4 B5 Legal Oficio II Letter Statement and 16K 2 in 1 Mode For copying two originals onto a single sheet This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals onto one sheet The following 2 in 1 options and output orientations are available Original Orientation of Original Platen Document processor NOTE When placing the original on the platen be sure to copy the originals in page order 4 9 Copying Functions 4 in 1 Mode For copying four originals onto a single sheet This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals onto one sheet The following 4 in 1 options and output orientations are available Original Orientation of Original Platen Document processor NOTE When placing the original on the platen be sure to copy the originals in page or
26. IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select IPv6 Setting 8 130 Default Setting System Menu 8 Press the OK key IPv6 Setting appears IPv6 Setting gt 0m 9 Press the A or V key to select On or Off 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP IP Settings menu NetWare Setup Select the NetWare network connection After that select frame types for NetWare network from Auto Ethernet ll 802 3 802 2 or SNAP The default settings is Off Use the procedure below to setup the NetWare setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select System and press the OK key Report Counter A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name password with administrator privileges to log in and ee press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System menu appears System 01l Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 4 Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Network Setting W W oil TCP IP Settings NetWare AppleTalk EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select NetWare 8 131 Frame Type 802 3 Ether II AppleTalk Setup Default Setting System Menu Press the OK key NetWare appears Press the A or V key to select On or Off If y
27. Rough Letterhead Color Colour Oficio Il Executive B6 ISO B5 Prepunched High Quality Custom 1 Envelope C5 16K Custom 148 x 210 to 8 to 216 x 356mm 5 13 16 x 8 5 16 to 8 1 2 x 14 inches Multi Purpose tray MP tray Supported types Supported paper sizes No of sheets Plain Preprinted Labels Bond Letter Legal Statement Executive 100 80g m Recycled Rough Vellum Oficio Il A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 Folio Letterhead Color Colour High 16k Quality Custom 1 to 8 Other sizes Portrait 2 76 to 8 50 or 70 to 216 mm Landscape 5 83 to 14 02 or 148 to 356 mm Thick paper A4 JIS B5 A5 Folio Legal Letter Oficio Il Statement Executive A6 B6 ISO B5 16K Other sizes Portrait 2 76 to 8 50 or 70 to 216 mm Landscape 5 83 to 14 02 or 148 to 356 mm Postcards Postcards 100 x 148 mm 1 Oufuku Hagaki return postcard Return postcard 148 x 200 mm Appendix 9 Supported types Supported paper sizes No of sheets Envelopes ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 Other sizes Portrait 2 76 to 8 50 or 70 to 216 mm Landscape 5 83 to 14 02 or 148 to 356 mm Transparency OHP film Letter A4 1 Appendix 10 Basic Paper Specifications This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular dry copiers and page printers such as laser printers It also supports a variety o
28. Send History Destination 2 Press the OK key Subject appears Subject printeri 3 Enter the e mail subject NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 4 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Log History menu 1 17 Pause and Resumption of Jobs Pause resume all printing jobs in printing waiting Status Job Cancel The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below 1 Status ol Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status Pause 2 3 Print Job Status 0 OKOLO 0009 amp Imaury s data 0010 Diaaaa Pause Menu 4 Pausing 0009 maury s data 0010 aaa Resume Menu Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu appears Press the A or V key to select Print Job Status Press the OK key Print Job Status appears Press Pause the Left Select key Printing is paused When you press Resume the Left Select key to resume printing NOTE When you press the Back key a confirmation Resume paused jobs screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key to resume Are you sure printing Canceling of Jobs For canceling jobs refer to Canceling Jobs on page 3 29 18 Status Job Cancel Device Communication Configure the devices lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status You can also control devices depending on their status Ch
29. The Function Default menu appears Function Default lt M 01 Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select EcoPrint 6 Press the OK key EcoPrint appears EcoPrint 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu 8 49 Default Setting System Menu File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name default for jobs Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No can also be set The table below lists the additional information available item o Description No additional information available Job No Date Adds the job number plus date and time Date Job No Adds date and time plus the job number NOTE e Refer to page 4 16 and page 5 17 for name entry e Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters Use the procedure below to set the default file name 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default mMm Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exi
30. When selecting Off in both E mail Folder and FAX menu CancelBeforeSend is not displayed 7 Press the A or V key to select Off On or Error Only When selecting CancelBeforeSend press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 Press the OK key A Result Report is sent Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Send Result menu 8 97 Adjustment Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance e Copy Denst Adj 8 98 e Send Box Density 8 99 e Correct Bk Line 8 100 e New Developer 8 101 e Auto Drum Refresh 8 102 e Drum Refresh 8 103 Default Setting System Menu NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Copy Denst Adj Adjust copy density Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density 1 Sys Menu Count lt Document Box i Edit Destination Adjust Maint 01 Copy Denst Adj Send Box Density Correct Bk Line Exit Copy Denst Adj Manual In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Adjust Maint Press the OK key The Adjust Maint menu appears Press the A or V key to select Copy Denst Adj Press the OK key Copy Denst Adj appears Press the A or V key to select Auto or Manual 8 98 Default Setting System Menu 6 Pr
31. enter the printer name 2 21 Preparation before Use NOTE AppleTalk icon is not displayed on Mac OS X 10 6 ane Add Printer a elge Q Protocol Line Printer Daemon LPD Address 00 Enter host name or IP address Queue Leave blank for default queue Name No Selection Location No Selection Print Using i Name No Selection Location No Selection Print Using 11 Select the installed printing system driver and click Add Protocol Line Printer Daemon LPD Address r 000 Valid and complete address Queue oe Leave blank for default queue Name r Location Print Using tw n so ua o 4 2 22 Preparation before Use 12 Select the options available for the printer and click Continue G Add Printer oS O amp S IP Default Fax Windows Search Installable Options Make sure your printer s options are accurately shown here so you can take full advantage of them For information on your printer and its optional hardware check the documentation that came with it Paper Feeders Three w Optional Disk _RAM Disk wa Cancel Continue 13 The selected printer is added This completes the printer setup procedure OC Print amp Fax Open Print Queue Options amp Supplies Status Idle Share this printer on the network Sharing Prefer
32. key to select Access Level press Change the Right Select key select the user access privilege and then press the OK key NOTE If the user list is for device administrator Change is not displayed 16 Press the gt key to select Account Name press Change the Right Select key select the account and then press the OK key NOTE If the user list is for device administrator and the device administrator does not log in Change is not displayed 17 After entering the user information press the OK key again Registered is displayed and the screen returns to Local User List Management Changing User Properties User information can be changed It can be changed only by a user with administrator privileges Use the procedure below to change the user properties NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit system Menu operation panel Counter O 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account Sys Menu Count gt 0 04 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and a press Login the Right Select key Login Password The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select User Login Set Login User Job Accoun
33. lease or otherwise transfer the Software and or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party By opening this diskette package you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement xxii Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used as well as a Sleep Mode where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time Low Power Mode The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 2 minutes have passed since the device was last used The amount of time
34. m o1 1 sided Display Error Error Handling alg OK DuplexPaperError PaperMismatchErr PaperMismatchErr gt 0 Ignore 0J Display Error 11 12 Default Setting System Menu Press the OK key DuplexPaperError appears Press the A or V key to select the method to handle if duplex is disabled Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Error Handling menu Press the A or V key to select PagerMismatchErr Press the OK key PagerMismatchErr appears Press the A or V key to select the method to handle paper mismatch Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Error Handling menu 8 26 Default Setting System Menu Date Timer Date Timer settings include e Date Time 8 27 e Date Format 8 29 e Time Zone 8 30 e Summer Time 8 31 e Auto Error Clear 8 32 e Auto Sleep 8 34 e Auto Panel Reset 8 37 e Low Power Timer 8 39 e Unusable Time 8 40 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Date Time 8 Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine If you perform Send as E mail the date and time set here will be displayed on the header CAUTION Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date Time setup Use the procedure below to set the date and time 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Coun
35. 1 hour 4 hours 7 Press the A or V key to select the period that jobs are retained 8 Press the OK key The screen returns to the Job Box screen 8 89 Default Setting System Menu Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key you can quickly set the function when printing from or saving to a document box You can register one of the following functions to each key for either of printing from and saving to a document box Print e None e Collate e Paper Selection e Duplex e File Name Entry e JobFinish Notice e Print Override e Encrypted PDF e TIFF Print e XPS FitTo Page e Del afterPrint Store e None e Color Selection e Original Size e Original Image e Scan Resolution e Storing Size e Zoom e Orig Orientation e Continuous Scan e File Format e File Name Entry e JobFinish Notice e Density e Duplex 8 90 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Document Box Send FAX Document Box 2 Press the OK key The Document Box menu appears Document Box lt gt 0 Sub Address Box 3 Press the A or V key to select Select Key Set Select Key Set Polling Box EXit 4 Press the OK key Select Key Set appears Select Key Set gt M Store 8 5 Press the A or V key to select Print or Store 6 Press the OK key T
36. 1102 The login user name is incorrect or the domain name has not been entered Enter login user name domain name and password correctly 1103 The network path name is incorrect or you do not have access to the folder specified Use Embedded Web Server and register the path name correctly 1104 No recipient address Enter E mail address correctly 1105 E mail The SMTP protocol setting is turned off Use Embedded Web Server and turn on the SMTP protocol setting Scan to PC SMB SMB setting is turned off Use Embedded Web Server and turn on the SMB setting Scan to PC FTP FTP setting is turned off Use Embedded Web Server and turn on the FTP setting 1106 The sender address setting under E mail SMTP is not registered Use Embedded Web Server and register the sender address 10 9 Troubleshooting Check points Corrective Actions ig tgs Send error 2101 2102 2103 2201 2202 2203 HHHH 3101 The network cable is disconnected or the hub that it is connected to is not operating properly Check the cable and the hub Otherwise the server name or the host name of the SMTP server is not set correctly Use Embedded Web Server and register the SMTP server name and the host name correctly 2204 The E mail size exceeds the acceptable send data capacity Decrease the size or resolution of the scanned data to be transmitted and resend the E mail 5101 5102 5103 5104 7102 720f Turn the main power swit
37. 2 2 Buzzer 8 6 C Cassette Loading Paper 2 42 Paper Size and Media Type 8 12 Cassette 1 1 5 Changing Language 2 9 8 3 Cleaning Separator 9 5 Slit Glass 9 3 Color Color Grayscale Black and White Selection 5 15 Color mode Color Selection Copy 8 42 Combine Mode 2 in 1 Mode 4 9 4 in 1 Mode 4 10 Page Boundary Lines 4 11 Connecting LAN Cable 2 5 Power Cable 2 9 USB Cable 2 9 Connection Method 2 3 Continuous Scan Copy 4 13 send 5 16 Conventions in This Guide xxviii Copy Adjusting Density 3 8 Collate Copying 3 15 Duplex Copying 3 12 Offset Copying 3 15 Originals 4 2 Selecting Image Quality 3 9 Setup 8 68 Zoom Copying 3 10 Copy Settings 8 68 Auto Paper Selection 8 70 8 71 Paper Selection 8 69 Quick Setup Registration 8 72 Copying Functions 4 1 Counting the Number of Pages Printed Each Job 11 33 Printing a Report 11 35 Total Job 11 31 Counting the Number of Pages Printed 11 31 D Date Timer 8 27 Auto Panel Reset 8 37 Date Format 8 29 Date Time 8 27 Low Power Timer 8 39 Time Zone 8 30 Default 8 42 2 in 1 8 57 4in 1 8 58 Index 1 Index Collate Offset 8 47 Color Selection Copy 8 42 Continuous Scan 8 52 Density 8 45 EcoPrint 8 49 E mail Subject Body 8 51 File Format 8 53 File Name 8 50 File Separation 8 54 Image Quality 8 63 Original Image 8 44 Original Orientation 8 48 scan Resolution 8 43 TIFF Print 8 55 XPS FitTo Page 8 56 Zoom 8 46 Default Gateway Appendix 2
38. A or V key to Sys Menu Count V select Copy User Job Account Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Copy menu appears Photo Processing Paper Selection AutoPaperSelect Exit Press the A or V key to select Paper Selection 4 Press the OK key Paper Selection appears Paper Selection lt Def PaperSource 5 Press the A or V key to select Auto or Def Paper Source 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu 8 69 Default Setting System Menu Auto Paper Selection If Auto is selected for Paper Selection set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes The table below shows the available settings Oe e MostSuitableSize Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original Same as OrigSize Select paper that matches the size of the original regardless the zoom Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt gt select Copy User Job Account Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Copy menu appears Photo Processing Paper Selection AutoPaperSelect Exit Press the A or V key to select AutoPaperSelect 4 Press the OK key AutoPaperSelect appears AutoPaperSelect lt gt ol MostSuitableSize Same as OrigSize 5 Press the A or V key to select MostSuitableSize o
39. Adjust Maint 2 Press the OK key The Adjust Maint menu appears Adjust Maint gt 0m 01 Copy Denst Adj Send Box Density Correct Bk Line Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Service Setting 8 102 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press the OK key The Service Setting menu appears Service Setting gt M Service Status Network Status New Developer Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Auto Drum Refresh 6 Press the OK key Auto Drum Refresh appears Auto Drum Refresh lt Mm Standard Long 7 Press the A or V key to select Off Standard or Long 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Service Setting menu Drum Refresh This sets the refresh mode for the drum When the printing quality declines refreshing the drum can restore the printing quality This is primarily used for maintenance by service personnel A 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Adjust Maint Document Box 0 Edit Destination Adjust Maint 2 Press the OK key The Adjust Maint menu appears Adjust Maint gt 0m 01i Copy Denst Adj Send Box Density Correct Bk Line Exit Press the A or V key to select Service Setting 4 Press the OK key The Service Setting menu appears Service Setting Mm 01 Service Status Network Status New Developer Bxit 5 Press the A or V key to select Drum R
40. Asia 70 A4 gt gt A5 50 25 Min Pacific Other 129 Statement gt gt Letter 78 Legal gt gt Letter 64 Letter gt gt Statement 3 10 The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below 1 Function Menu Sad OK Paper Selection O Collate Duplex 2 3 Auto Standard Zoom 4 Standard Zoom Sa OK 129 STMT gt gt LTR 732 DCL gt S LTR Zoom Entry a OK 25 400 2008 5 6 Basic Operation Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Zoom Press the OK key Zoom appears Press the A or V key to select the desired magnification To copy in the same size as the original select 100 To select automatic zoom select Auto To use fixed magnifications select Standard Zoom and press the OK key Standard Zoom appears Press the A or V key to select the desired magnification If you select Other and press the OK key you can select from additional magnifications To enter a magnification select Zoom Entry and press the OK key Zoom Entry appears Use the numeric keys to enter the any magnification Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen Press the Start key Copying begins Basic Operation Duplex Copying Produce two sided copies The following duplex options are available You can also create single sided copies from two sided originals or originals with facing pages such as bo
41. Brand Name gt Uninstall Brand Name Product Library and uninstall the software Setting TWAIN Driver Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver 1 Start the TWAIN Driver by clicking start gt All Programs gt Brand Name gt TWAIN Driver Setting 2 Click Add Scanner List Name About Help 3 Enter the machine name in the Name field Scanner ddress Image Compression Color O Yes amp No Compression Level E j Low High Image Compression Gray Monochrome Compression Level E Low High Unit Inch C Metric User Authentication Settings 2 24 Preparation before Use 4 Click V next to the Model field and select this machine from the list 5 Click User Authentication Settings If user login administration is invalid go to Step 7 6 Select the checkbox beside Authentication enter Login User Name up to 64 characters and Password up to 64 characters and then click OK V Authentication Login user name administrator Password Account ID Cancel 7 Click OK 8 The machine is registered to the PC and the machine name and model name are displayed in the Scanner List field NOTE Click Delete to delete the added machine Click Edit to change names and other settings 2 25 Preparation before Use Setting the WIA Driver Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7 Register this machine to the WIA Driver NOTE The followi
42. Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm 0l Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 8 63 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default lt M Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Detail Setting 6 Press the OK key The Detail Setting menu appears Detail Setting Cmd OK 2 in 1 layout Ay anw i Layout Border Line EXit 7 Press the A or V key to select Image Quality 8 Press the OK key Image Quality appears Image Quality Sa OK 01 1 Low High Comp 9 Press the A or V key to select from 1 Low High Comp to 5 High Low Comp 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu Color TIFF Comp set the default value for compression method for TIFF images handled by this machine Use the procedure below to set the default value for color TIFF compression method 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm 01 Language Default Screen Sound i EXit 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 8 64 Default Setting System Menu 4 Pre
43. Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 6 Enter the file name press the OK key Additional Info appears NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 7 Enter the date and time job number etc on the screen and then press the OK key NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu Sending Functions Subject and Body Entry When sending E mail enter the subject and body of the E mail Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E mail message and then send the E mail NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu ad OK hl Color Selection O Original Size o Original Image O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Subject Body Press the OK key Subject Entry appears Subject Entry 0 6 Enter the subject and press the OK key NOTE Up to 60 characters can be entered for the subject 7 Enter the body and press the OK key Body Entry NOTE Up to 500 characters can be entered for the body C
44. F Block Set Security Level Bxit In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The System menu appears Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 8 134 Network Setting TCP IP Settings NetWare AppleTalk Exit WSD PRINT Off Default Setting System Menu 4 Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select WSD PRINT 6 Press the OK key The WSD PRINT menu appears 7 Press the A or V key to select On or Off 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Settings menu 8 135 Protocol Detail Make other network related settings NetBEUI Selects whether or not to receive documents using NetBEUI LPD Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol FTP Server Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP FTP Client Select whether or not to send documents using FTP and the number of the port to be used Raw Port Select whether or not to receive documents using Raw Port LDAP SNMP SNMPv3 set SNMPv3 SMB Select whether or not to send documents using SMB SMTP Select whether or not to E mail TX send e mail using SMTP PO
45. MP Tray return it to its original package and reseal it If using the products with the fax function installed the main power switch is off transmitting receiving Fax is disabled Do not turn off the main power switch but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep mode XVI Laser Safety Europe Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body For this reason laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover In the normal operation of the product by user no radiation can leak from the machine This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825 1 2007 Caution Performance of procedures other than exposure those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area DANGER ATTENTION VORSICHT ATTENZIONE PRECAUCION VARO A i KLASS ES 34 zs CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU E3 SERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET N K B LASERST NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZE CLASSE 3B RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO CLASSE 3B RADIACIONE LASER CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN 3B LASERS TEI
46. Noma Yes Custom 08 Yes Can be stored No Cannot be stored This is a paper type defined and registered by the user Up to eight types of user settings may be defined User can also enable or disable the duplex path when using Custom For Custom 1 8 settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed a a Duplex Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed Duplex printing allowed Name Change names for Custom 1 8 Names should be not more than 16 characters Selecting media type at multi purpose tray the name after change will be displayed Use the procedure below to set the paper weight 8 16 Default Setting System Menu 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count V 0m select Common Settings System User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm 0l Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set 4 Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears Orig Paper Set gt 00 01 Custom Orig Size Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Media Type Set 6 Press the OK key Media Type Set menu appears Media type Set Transparency Rough EXit 7 Press the A or V key to select the paper type for which you want to make settings 8 Press the OK key The menu for the selected paper type
47. Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default Mm 01 Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Density 6 Press the OK key Density appears 7 Press the A or V key to select Auto or Manual 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu 8 45 Default Setting System Menu Zoom Select the enlarged reduced default when paper size sending size changed after the originals set The available default settings are shown below ee 100 Copy send save at actual size 100 Auto Automatically reduce or enlarge the originals to match paper size sending size Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count eV 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm 01 Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default gt mMm 01 Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Zoom 6 Press the OK key Zoom appears 7 Press the A or V key to select 100 or Auto 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns
48. Press the OK key The Language menu appears 8 Language z oi xEnglish The available languages are as follows Deutsch English Prancals Deutsch Francais Espanol Italiano Nederlands Pycckun Portugu s The optional languages are as follows 8 3 8 4 Default Setting System Menu Optional language Message display Simplified Chinese HeRR Traditional Chinese ie ow If you are using one of the optional languages it is displayed in place of Portugues Press the A or V key to select a language Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu Default Screen Default Setting System Menu Select the screen appearing right after start up default screen The options are as follows The table below lists the available screens ee The Status Job Cancel screen the screen shown when the Status Job Cancel key is pressed Document Box appears The Copy screen the screen shown when the Copy key is pressed appears The Send screen the screen shown when the Send key is pressed appears The FAX screen the screen shown when the FAX key is pressed appears The Document Box screen the screen shown when the Document Box key is pressed appears Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen Sys Menu Count System lt gt OK User Job Account 05 Common Settings Common Settings Language Default Screen So
49. Scan e File Name Entry e JobFinish Notice e Print Override Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt gt select Copy User Job Account Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Copy menu appears Photo Processing Paper Selection AutoPaperSelect Exit Press the A or V key to select Select Key Set 4 Press the OK key Select Key Set appears Select Key Set gt M Right 5 Press the A or V key to select Left or Right 8 72 Left Duplex Combine This function is already registered Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key This displays the function selection screen for the flexible key selected in step 5 The screen shown is the one when Left is selected 7 Press the A or V key to select the function you want to register to the flexible key 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu IMPORTANT If you try to set the function that is registered to the other flexible key you cannot set it and This function is already registered is displayed 8 73 Default Setting System Menu Printer Settings Printing from computers settings are generally made on the application software screen However the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine Emulation Set 8 74 EcoPrint 8 77 Override A4 L
50. See the name of this computer W Device Manager Personalization i Windows Update Clock Language and Region Turn automatic updating on or off Check for updates View installed updates Ease of Access r Power Options Require a password when the computer wakes Change what the power buttons Change when the computer sleeps T Backup and Restore Back up your computer Restore files from backup gt Se Ritl acker Nrive Enenmtinn NOTE If the User Account Control dialog box appears click the Continue button P Windows Firewall Allowed Programs x Search Contro Pane Allow programs to communicate through Windows Firewall To add change or remove allowed programs and ports click Change settings What are the risks of allowing a program to communicate Allowed programs and features Name Home Work Private Public O BranchCache Content Retrieval Uses HTTP O BranchCache Hosted Cache Client Uses HTTPS O BranchCache Hosted Cache Server Uses HTTPS O BranchCache Peer Discovery Uses WSD O Connect to a Network Projector Core Networking m HOOOOO HOOOOO Dieter ib File and Printer Sharing Homebroup Ld O iSCSI Service o o O Media Center Extenders o o O Netlogon Service go O T Details Remove Allow another program Adding a port Search Control Pane 2 Control Panel System and Security g
51. Select Menu Folder Memory Detail Remove Memory USB memory can be safely removed 1 Press the Document Box key The Document Box menu appears N Press the A or V key to select USB Memory Oo Press the OK key USB Memory appears 4 Press Menu the Left Select key A menu appears NOTE This is the image on the screen when a folder is selected Open is not displayed when a file is selected 5 Press the A or V key to select Remove Memory 6 Press the OK key A confirmation message appears 7 Press OK the Right Select key or remove the USB memory The screen returns to the Document Box menu 6 8 Document Box Printing from a Job Box When optional memory is installed and RAM Disk Mode is enabled you can use a Job Box to print Job Box is a function that stores print data on the set RAM disk in the machine enabling the data to be printed as needed from the operation panel of the machine If an ID 4 digit number is set when printing is executed from the computer the data can be kept more confidential When an ID is set the ID must be entered in order to print the stored data from the machine For the RAM disk settings see RAM Disk Mode on page 8 67 Private Print Private Print is used to allow printing only after the same 4 digit ID that was entered in the printing system driver at the time of printing is entered at the operation panel The data is erased after printing For informa
52. Sending Functions 5 1 1 If the destination is not stored in the address book you can send by entering the address directly vi Administrator tasks To send a FAX Only on products with the fax function installed As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines you can also send a FAX via a network Um Itfaxes NOTE For more information on setting up and sending a FAX refer to the FAX Operation Guide FAX directly Send a FAX from a computer Connect the modular cord for the telephone line to this machine Selection of Telephone Line Inch version only Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Install the Network FAX Driver on your computer 1 Selection of Transmit Terminal Identification TTI 2 3 on the FAX Operation Guide 2 Place the originals on the platen FAX Operation About Network Operation Basic 3 1 FAX 7 1 on the FAX Operation on the FAX Operation Guide Guide 4 For more information refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide 2 If the destination is not stored in the address book you can send the FAX by entering the address directly vii Menu Map Copy key Function Menu key page 4 3 ane Print Override page 4 17 Function Menu key page 5 15 au ssc Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Seles on Continued on next page
53. Size Type Paper Size select from the standard sizes Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size Letter Legal Statement and Oficio Il Metric size A4 A5 A6 B5 Folio and 16K Media Type Plain Rough Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead High Quality and Custom 1 8 Statement and A6 can only be used in cassette 1 To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page 8 16 NOTE If using the products equipped with the fax function the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below Plain Recycled Bond Color High Quality and Rough When the paper size dial on a cassette is set to OTHER a paper size can be set for the cassette 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter When you are performing user management and have Login User Name W not logged in a login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password to log in Login Password l NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for Login details on entering characters 2 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 49 lt gt OK Common Settings Language Default Screen Sound EXit Orig Paper Set m Custom Orig Size Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize EXit Cassette 1 Set Cas
54. System User Job Account 05 Common Settings Common Settings lt mMm Language Default Screen Sound Exit Login User Name Login Password Login Date Setting Sa OK Date Time Date Format Time Zone Exit Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit operation panel In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Date Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The Date Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select Time Zone lt gt OK Time Zone GMT Casablanca 61I GMT Greenwich 32 01 00 Amsterdam Date Setting a OK Date Format Time Zone Summer Time Date Setting ai OK Date Time Date Format Time Zone Exit lt gt OK Date Time Year Month Day 2011 01 Time Zone Greenwich 10 11 12 13 14 15 Preparation before Use Press the OK key Time Zone appears Press the A or V key to select your region and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu Press the A or V key to select Summer Time Press the OK key Summer Time appears Press the A or V key to select On or Off and then press the O
55. System menu appears 01l Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level EXit Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 4 Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Network Setting gt Secure Protocol Host Name LAN Interface Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Secure Protocol 6 Press the OK key Secure Protocol appears Secure Protocol m SSL IPP Security HTTP Security 7 Press the A or V key to select HTTP Security 8 Press the OK key HTTP Security appears HTTP Security lt gt 0 HTTP HTTPS 9 Press the A or V key to select HTTP HTTPS or HTTPS only 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu 8 143 LDAP Security Default Setting System Menu Specify the protocol to be used for LDAP The default setting is Off Use the procedure below to make the setting Sys Menu Count lt Report Counter Login User Name Login Password Login System Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Network Setting gt Secure Protocol Host Name LAN Interface Exit lt gt OK Secure Protocol IPP Security HTTP Security LDAP Security In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login
56. You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11 23 Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 11 31 and Printing an Accounting Report on page 11 35 for details Use the procedure below to set the counting methods 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter O Sys Menu Count gt 0 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and ty press Login the Right Select key Login Password l NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for Login details on entering characters 3 The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set User Job Account User Login Set Job Account set Unknown ID Job Exit 11 22 Management 5 Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears Job Account Set lt Mm Job Accounting Account Report Total Accounting EXit 6 Press the A or V key to select Default Setting 7 Press the OK key The Default Setting menu appears Default Setting Apply Limit Copy
57. appears 9 Press the A or V key to select Paper Weight 10 Press the OK key The Paper Weight menu appears Paper Weight Normal 3 Normal 1 11 Press the A or V key to select the weight of paper 8 17 Paper Weight 0l Paper Weight Duplex Name Prohibit 0l Paper Weight Duplex Name Name Entry RD Center Paper Weight Duplex Name 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Default Setting System Menu Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected paper type When the selected paper type is Custom 1 to 8 you can further set whether to enable or disable duplex and the name of the custom paper type Press the A or V key to select Duplex Press the OK key The Duplex menu appears Press the A or V key to select whether to enable or disable duplex Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected custom paper type Press the A or V key to select Name Press the OK key Name Entry is displayed Enter the name of the custom paper type NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 19 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected custom paper type 8 18 Default Setting System Menu Media for Auto Selection When Auto is selected in Paper Selection the paper source that is automatic
58. be read by OCR This function is only available for black and white mode Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals Function Menu lt gt OK 01 Color Selection O Original Size Original Image EXit Original Image 0 J Text Photo Photo Text E O lt gt OK 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Original Image Press the OK key Original Image appears 6 Press the A or V key to select the desired image quality 7 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 12 Sending Functions Adjusting Density Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals The table below shows the available settings Adjust density using 7 levels Auto Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu ai OK 01 Color Selection O Original Size o Original Image O0 Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Density 5 Press the OK ke
59. e Sending the Job Log History cccceecceeeeeeeeee ees 7 13 e Pause and Resumption of JODS cccceeeece eee eee es 7 18 ICANCEIING Of I ODS arraren ias binds aindsasanezastik 7 18 e Device COMMUNICATION ccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeaeeeees 7 19 Checking Job Status Status Job Cancel Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed Available Status Screens The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the Message Display in four different screens Print Job Send Job Store Job and Scheduled Job The following job statuses are available Screen Job statuses to be displayed Print Job Send Job Store Job Scheduled Job Print Job Status Screen Status Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status Pause Print Job Status gt 0m o008 E Copy Copy Printer FAX reception Document Box E mail reception Job Report List Printing data from removable memory FAX transmission PC SMB FTP transmission E mail Application Multiple destination Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission Scan FAX Printer 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu appears 2 Press the A or V key to select Print Job Status 3 Press the OK key Print Job Status appears Press the A or V key to check the print queue Status Job Cancel l Press the OK key to check detailed information of the 0009 Detail se
60. ea 5 aight Set EREE ie a Sua i Ea See eh a ea een Bw ae ete are 5 3 ZOOM sie ih th i hia ih Geta Ma nn ee GIR a e a a a a ka ea E Bae a ad 5 5 DUDICK SCNOING sd credits ss inep a a E A R oe een Bae a geese Ma 5 7 Onidinal ONENA oesie a a a a A E a S E a A A a 5 8 PISF OMe ra Sem hy cesta at Santen cue a a a a a a E E a EEE RAES 5 10 OnIGINGINIMAGG ss sues aa aa a ee a aa a a a a a ee eee 5 12 Agustino DCMS ras ssiosie doe ba nara e aa G in a erp Ee a a E ae 5 13 SCAM RESOIUUON iiron eh raa TAA E R E ee hie ee es 5 14 Color Grayscale Black and White Selection 0 000 0000 cee eee 5 15 CONUNUOUS SCAN aaa a a a a Bees Mode ete eee a a a 5 16 FIG NAMG ENUY 2 ication ta de a Sek ue a aa a eae doh ee eS oh ees hee 5 17 SUDICCL ANG BOGY ENV w04 25 baw eile ee oS ues Nee Dad Mae othe tes 5 18 WA EID Call tenct seus a Serene arena test a encan Shere S Secon a ec ee eee aeons a 5 19 JOO FIMSANOUCE si hee a a See a aa a REE Ee ee ee E eS 5 21 FIP 111016 01 10 ial lp omen eee ee a Ne a an e a E aa a e a p a a a aa 5 23 FNC Separat ON assieta bode Re eae BE AAE E a A ee E A AES 5 24 Scanning Image using Application a na aaa aaa aaa eee eens 5 25 Document Box Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory 0 0 0 0 cc eee 6 2 Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB 0 0 0 000 6 6 Removing USB Memory 000 ce eee eee tees 6 8 Printing rom AOD BOX so a5 aad ee oem a oa ah Madd heed areas a cone Gta Sede
61. in with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password Login NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Ifthe screen shown appears during operations enter the Login User Name login user name Login Password Login 2 Press the V key The input cursor moves to Login Password 3 Enter the login password Press the A key to move the input cursor to Login User Name 4 Check the login user name and password are correct and press Login the Right Select key NOTE The following administrator is registered in the machine at the factory Login User Name 4000 Login Password 4000 Logout To logout from the machine press the Logout to return to the login user name password entry screen Logout 3 2 Basic Operation One Touch Keys and Program Keys The one touch keys and program keys on the operation panel are described below One Touch Key Register destinations to one touch keys and you can enter the desired destination by pressing the applicable one touch key For registering a destination to a one touch key refer to Adding a Destination on One touch Key on page 8 116 Entering Destination with One touch Key 1 In Address Entry press the one touch key where the Address Entry aid OK desired destination is registered Recalling from One touch Keys 1 to 11 Press the one touch key where the destination is reg
62. information on Low Power Mode refer to Auto Low Power Mode on page 2 8 Use the procedure below to set the Low Power Mode 8 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings 0l Language Default Screen Sound EXit 3 Pressthe A or V key to select Timer Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and Cea i press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 4 The Timer Settings menu appears Timer Setting gt 0m Err Clear Timer Sleep Timer PanelReset Timer EXit 8 39 Low Power Timer 1 240 i Unusable Time You can specify the prohibition period to use Default Setting System Menu Press the A or V key to select Low Power Timer Press the OK key Low Power Timer appears Press the A or V key or numeric keys to set the Low Power Timer Set the amount of time before entering the low power state in minutes Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu NOTE Even during unusable time the machine can be operated by entering the Unlock Code Use the procedure below to set the Unusable Time Sys Menu Count 0m System
63. key Subject Entry appears Enter the e Subject Entry aid OK mail subject up to 60 characters If you press the Back key you can return to the Function Default menu 7 Press the OK key Body Entry appears Enter e mail Body Entry body text up to 500 characters If you press the Back key you can return to Subject Entry 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu Continuous Scan Set the continuous scan defaults The available default settings are shown below o o e S Continuous scan not performed Continuous scan performed Refer to page 4 6 for Original Orientation Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt gt select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 8 52 Default Setting System Menu 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound EXit 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default lt mMm Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Continuous Scan 6 Press the OK key Continuous Scan appears Continuous Scan lt gt 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 Press the OK ke
64. key to display Address Number Detail gt 0 address Number 4 4 019 2 Press Edit the Right Select key An entry screen address Number appears COUL E0 3 Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to enter the address number 4 Press the OK key The address number is registered NOTE If you enter an address number that is already registered the screen will display This address number is already registered and return to the screen of step 2 Editing a Destination Edit delete the destinations individuals you added to the Address Book Use the procedure below to edit a destination 7 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Edit Destination FAX Document Box i Edit Destination 8 114 Default Setting System Menu 2 Press the OK key The Edit Destination menu appears Edit Destination gt M addressbook Prine List 3 Press the A or V key to select Address Book 4 Press the OK key The Address Book list screen Addressbook lt 0 appears eeDesign amp Fiala amp Maury 5 Press the A or V key to select the destination you want to edit 6 Press Menu the Right Select key Menu appears 8 Detail Edit Delete Add Address 7 Press the A or V key to select Detail Edit 8 Press the OK key This displays the screen for editing Detall the selected destination Contact name Ga lily The screen shown is the one when an ind
65. length guide to the desired paper size When using non standard size paper move the paper width guide and paper length guide all the way out insert the paper then adjust the paper width guides and paper length guide to the size of the paper Adjust them so that they are in light contact with the paper 6 Place the paper in the paper cassette Ensure the side to be printed is facing down and the paper is not folded curled or damaged 2 43 Preparation before Use NOTE Do not load more paper than will fit under the load limits on the paper width guides The cassette holds up to 500 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m 7 Set the stack of paper so that it is under the clips as shown 8 Insert the cassette into the slot in the printer Push it straight in as far as it will go There is a paper gauge on the right side of the front of the paper cassette to indicate the remaining paper supply When paper is exhausted the pointer will go down to the level of LI empty 2 44 Preparation before Use Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray The multi purpose tray will hold up to 100 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A4 to A6 and Hagaki and from Legal to Statement R and 16K Be sure
66. memory size is 768 MB NOTE The expansion memory should only be installed by your service technician We shall not be liable for any damages caused by improper installation of expansion memory Appendix 2 Precautions for Handling the Memory Module To protect electronic parts discharge static electricity Correct Incorrect from your body by touching a water pipe faucet or other large metal object before handling the memory module Or wear an antistatic wrist strap if possible when you install the memory module Installing the Memory Module 1 Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable 2 Remove the right cover 3 Remove the screws and the memory slot cover as shown in the figure 4 Remove the memory module from its package 5 Aligning the cutouts of the memory module with the matching keys of the socket carefully plug the memory module into the memory socket until it clicks in place Then push down the memory module to secure CAUTION Before inserting a memory module in the machine make sure that the machine is switched off Appendix 3 6 After you finish installing the memory module secure the memory slot cover with screws removed in step 3 7 Reinstall the right cover Removing the Memory Module To remove a memory module remove the right cover and the memory slot cover from the machine Then carefully push out the two socket clamps Ease
67. or more optional feeders are installed Place original 2 55 and press Start key Remove originals from the document processor put them back in their original order and place them again Press the Start key to resume printing Press the Stop key to cancel the job Paper jammed If a paper jam occurs the machine 10 13 will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the Message Display Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed paper Troubleshooting Check points Corrective Actions ig vos Job not stored Press OK N ii the OK key to store the job a Remove original from Are there any originals a in Remove originals from the document document processor the document processor processor Maximum Number of scanned pages Job is canceled Is the acceptable scanning count exceeded Send error HHH Scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory of scanner The job is canceled Press the OK key Press the OK key to print send or store the scanned pages Press the Stop key to cancel printing sending or storing An error has occurred during transmission The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 1101 The server name of the SMTP server is not set correctly or the host name is incorrect when sending scan data to an FTP server Use Embedded Web Server and register the SMTP server name and the host name correctly
68. or V key to select Total Accounting Press the OK key The Total Accounting menu appears Press the A or V key to select the function of which you want to check counts and then press the OK key If you select Printed Pages or Scanned Pages press the lt or gt key to switch the counted items After confirming the content press the OK key The screen returns to the Total Accounting menu To reset the counter press the A or V key to select Counter Reset Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears 11 32 Management 12 Press Yes the Left Select key The counter is reset Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Total Accounting menu Each Job Accounting Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit system Menu operation panel Counter O 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account Sys Menu Count gt 00 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and pe fe ft Et press Login the Right Select key Login Password NOTE The User Job Account menu appears Refer to Login Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 3
69. out of the machine AALI ANY WWW Open the feed cover 25 Remove the paper from the machine If the jammed paper appears to be pinched by rollers pull it along the normal running direction of the paper NOTE If you cannot find a paper jam try checking inside the rear of the printer Refer to Rear Unit on page 5 18 a Or Sts A oa WL y 5 Insert the developer unit together with the toner container back into the machine ANY AI N AA AN AN WW 6 Close the top cover and front cover The machine warms up and resumes printing 10 16 Troubleshooting Rear Unit Follow the steps below to clear paper jams of the rear unit 1 If paper is not completely ejected into the output tray open the rear cover 2 Open the fuser cover and remove the jammed paper by pulling it out i o e e e e o CT AH PECE ay ee NOTE If you cannot find a paper jam try checking inside a the rear of the machine Zs p y CAUTION The fuser unit inside the machine is hot Do not touch it with your hands as it may result in burn injury Remove jammed paper carefully 3 Close the rear cover The machine warms up and resumes printing out Document Processor Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the document processor 1 Remove all of the originals from the document feed tray 10 17 Troubleshooting
70. press the OK key Report Counter A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and PT yy tT st press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System menu appears System gt 0m Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select I F Block Set 4 Press the OK key The I F Block Set menu appears I F Block Set Mm USB Host USB Device Option I F EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select USB Host 8 146 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key USB Host appears 0 Unblock Block 7 Press the A or V key to select Unblock or Block 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the I F Block Set menu USB Device USB interface setting This locks and protects the USB interface connector B1 USB Device The default setting is Unblock Use the procedure below to specify the USB Device setting s 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select System and press the OK key Report Counter A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and A press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System menu appears System gt 0m Network Setting I F Bloc
71. returns to the basic screen for sending Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 14 Sending Functions Color Grayscale Black and White Selection This feature allows you to select the select the color mode used for scanning when sending images You can select from Full Color Grayscale or Black amp White Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images Function Menu lt gt OK Color Selection O Original Size Original Image Exit Color Selection Grayscale Black amp White O E lt gt OK Press the Send key Place the original Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Color Selection Press the OK key Color Selection appears Press the A or V key to select the desired color mode Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 15 Continuous Scan Sending Functions When the multi page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job With this function originals can be scanned one after another until you press E
72. sending size 5 3 Sending Functions Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 4 Sending Functions Zoom scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size The table below lists the available options 100 No Zoom to be scanned at actual size Zoomed automatically according to the specified sending size NOTE When zooming in or out see Sending Size on page 5 3 when selecting the sending size When Custom Size or Size Entry is selected as the original size the originals are sent at normal size and zooming cannot be used Depending on the combination of original size and sending size the image is placed at the edge Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original 3 Select the transmission size 4 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Original Size Original Image Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Zoom 6 Press the OK key Zoom appears 7 Press the A or V key to select 100 or Auto and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start se
73. that is able to run on a variety of operating systems POP3 Post Office Protocol 3 A standard protocol to receive E mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems It enables flexible font functions and highly functional graphics allowing higher quality printing The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985 followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two byte languages e g Japanese in 1990 In 1996 Level 3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies PPM prints per minute This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute Appendix 23 Printing System Driver The software to enable you to print data created on any application software The printing system driver for the machine is contained in the DVD ROM enclosed in the package Install the printing system driver on the computer connected to the machine Send as E mail A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E mail attachment E mail addresses can be selected from the list or entered at each time SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A protocol for E mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers Status Page The page li
74. the platen 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu ai OK Color Selection UO Original Size O Original Image O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select FTP Encrypted TX 5 Press the OK key FTP Encrypted TX appears FTP Encrypted TX gt 6 Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu NOTE Click Advanced gt Secure Protocols in the Embedded Web Server Be sure that SSL of Secure Protocol Settings is On and more than two effective encryptions are selected in Clientside Settings For details refer to the Embedded Web Server Operation Guide 5 23 File Separation Sending Functions Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page and send the files Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals Function Menu lt gt OK Color Selection O Original Size Original Image Exit File Separation Each Page E O lt gt OK 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select File Separation Press the OK key File Separation appears 6 Press the A or V key to select Each P
75. the FAX Operation Guide error occurred TX RX Result Report and Appendix Activity Report If the error Error Code List code starts with U or E perform the corresponding procedure Is the destination FAX line Send again busy Does the destination FAX Send again machine respond Is there an error other Contact your Service than above Representative 10 12 Troubleshooting Clearing Paper Jams If a paper jam occurs a message will be displayed about the jam and copying or printing will stop Leave the main power switch on and to remove the jammed paper refer to the following information below Jam Location Indicators If a paper jam occurs the error message displays the location of the jam Paper Jam Location Reference Page Inside the machine 10 15 MP Tray 10 14 Rear unit Precautions with Paper Jams lf a paper jam occurs a message will be displayed about the jam and copying or printing will stop e Do not reuse jammed papers e Ifthe paper tears during removal be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming e A page affected by a paper jam will be printed again CAUTION The fixing unit is extremely hot Take sufficient care when working in this area as there is a danger of getting burned Online Help Messages When Paper Jam is displayed press Help the Left Select key to display the procedu
76. the Right Finish Binding V0 Select key and you can select the binding edge of the i finished copies and the original setting orientation After pressing the OK key select the binding edge of the Orig Orientation 0 finished copies and the original setting orientation iTop Edge Top Edge left R If you select 2 sided gt gt 1 sided press Detail the Right Orig Binding lt 0 Select key and you can select the binding edge of the i original and the original setting orientation After pressing the OK key select the binding edge of the Orig Orientation lt gt original and finished copies and the original setting Ai Top Edge Top orientation Edge left 3 13 Orig Binding Finish Binding Orig Orientation iTop Edge left Scanning Job No Page s Cancel Set original and press Start key Job No 9999 Page s 3 Cancel End Scan Basic Operation If you select 2 sided gt gt 2 sided press Detail the Right Select key and you can select the binding edge of the original After pressing the OK key select the binding edge of the finished copies After pressing the OK key select the original setting orientation Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen Press the Start key Copying begins If the original is placed on the platen replace it with the next one before pressing the Start key If there is no next origina
77. the Right Select key The System menu appears Press the A or V key to select Network Setting Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select Secure Protocol Press the OK key Secure Protocol appears Press the A or V key to select LDAP Security 8 144 Default Setting System Menu 8 Press the OK key LDAP Security appears LDAP Security gt 0m LDAPv3 TLS LDAP over SSL 9 Press the A or V key to select Off DAPv3 TLS or LDAP over SSL 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu SNMPv3 Setting Sets up SNMPv3 The default setting is Off Use the procedure below Refer to Protocol Detail on page 8 136 about the procedures 8 145 Default Setting System Menu Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces The following interface block settings are available e USB Host USB memory slot setting e USB Device USB interface setting e Optional interface Optional interface card setting USB Host USB memory slot setting This locks and protects the USB memory slot A1 or USB port A2 USB host The default setting is Unblock Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select System and
78. time difference in the location you are from GMT Use the procedure below to set the time difference 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Date Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name password with administrator privileges to log in and a press Login the Right Select key Login Password Menu Login 4 The Date Settings menu appears Date Setting lt gt 0m 01 Date Time Date Format Time Zone Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Time Zone 6 Press the OK key Time Zone appears Time Zone gt m GMT Casablanca 61 GMT Greenwich 32 01 00 Amsterdam 7 Press the A or V key to select your location 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu NOTE If you select a region that does not utilize summer time the summer time setting screen will not appear 8 30 Default Setting System Menu Summer Time Set whether or not to apply summer time to the display of the date Use the procedure below to set Summer Time 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select Common Settin
79. to select Adj PrintDirect or Speed Priority 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig Paper Set menu 8 22 Default Setting System Menu Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time Options are 1 999 copies Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies z 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count V 0m select Common Settings System User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound l Exit Press the A or V key to select Preset Limit 8 4 Press the OK key The Preset Limit menu appears Preset Limit 1 999 5 Press the A or V key to enter the number of copies 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu 8 23 Default Setting System Menu Switching Unit of Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions Use the procedure below to change the input units z 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings System User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound l Exit Press the A or V key to select Measurement 4 Press the OK key
80. to select On and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP IP Settings menu 10 Press the A or V key to select IPv4 Setting 11 Press the OK key The IPv4 Setting menu appears 12 Press the A or V key to select Bonjour 13 Press the OK key Bonjour appears 14 Press the A or V key to select On or Off and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu 8 129 Default Setting System Menu TCP IP IPv6 Setup set up TCP IP IPv6 to connect to the network The default setting is Off Use the procedure below to setup the TCP IP IPv6 setting R 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select System and press the OK key Report Counter system A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and phat als fiele a Lt de press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System menu appears System Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level EXit 3 Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 4 Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Network Setting gt TCP IP Settings NetWare AppleTalk EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select TCP IP Settings 6 Press the OK key The TCP IP Settings menu appears TCP IP Settings M
81. upper orientation of original To use the functions below select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen e 1 sided 2 sided Selection When placing the original on the platen Top Edge Top Top Edge Left When placing the original on the document processor Top Edge Top Top Edge Left Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Original Size Original Image Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Orig Orientation Press the OK key Orig Orientation appears Orig Orientation iTop Edge Top 02 i iTOD Edge Left 5 8 Sending Functions Press the A or V key to select Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending Function Menu 5 9 NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in gi Sending Functions File Format Select the file format of the image to send The table below lists the file formats and their details Adjustable range of image Color mode quality 1 Low Quality High Comp 5 High Quality Low Comp ee to Full Color Grayscale Black and White TIFF 1 Low Qualit
82. with administrator privileges to log in and Pe press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 11 15 User Job Account M User Login Set Job Account set Unknown ID Job Exit Job Account Set lt m 0i Job Accounting Account Report Total Accounting EXit Job Accounting Cmd OK Management NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set 5 Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears 6 Press the A or V key to select Job Accounting 7 Press the OK key Job Accounting appears 8 Press the A or V key to select On To disable job accounting select Off 9 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Account Set menu NOTE When the display returns to the System Menu default screen logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears To continue the operation enter the Account ID 11 16 Login Logout Management If job accounting is enabled an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine Use the procedure below to login and logout Login NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters Logout Account ID Counter Logout 1 Inthe screen below enter the account ID using the numeric k
83. 0i Auto Sending Send History Destination Exit 2 Press the OK key Auto Sending appears Auto Sending alg OK 3 Press the A or V key to select Off or On If you select On and press the OK key Jobs appears Use the numeric keys to enter the number of jobs to be sent at a time 4 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Log History menu Manual Job Log History Transmission You can also send the job log history to the specified destinations manually Use the procedure below to send the job log history manually 1 Inthe Job Log History menu press the A or V key to Job Log History V0 select Send History Auto Sending Send History Destination EXit 2 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Send the job log hasvory Are you sure Yes 16 Status Job Cancel IMPORTANT If no destination is registered Enter Enter destination destination is displayed Refer to Registering Destination on page 15 and register the desired destination 3 Press Yes the Left Select key Accepted is displayed and the job log is sent to the registered destination before the screen returns to the Job Log History menu Setting E mail Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending job log histories by e mail Use the procedure below to set the subject A 1 Inthe Job Log History menu press the A or V key to Job Log History Vm select Subject
84. 1 Does a paper lift error occurr Pull out the cassette for the paper in the paper source s source displayed either the paper cassette cassettes or optional paper feeders and check if the paper is loaded correctly Cannot connect to Press the OK key and check the Authentication Server following items e Registration to Authentication serve Password and computer address for Authentication Server Connection of Network Cannot duplex print Did you select a paper size Select the available paper type on this paper media type that cannot be Press the OK key to print without duplex printed using Duplex Incorrect account ID Job is canceled This job is canceled because it is restricted by Job Accounting Press the OK key Restricted by Job Accounting Cannot This job cannot be printed because it is restricted by Job Accounting Press print the OK key Cannot execute this This job is canceled because it is job Restricted by restricted by Group Authorization Group Authorization Press the OK key Troubleshooting Check points Corrective Actions ges Close front cover Is there any cover which is Close the cover indicated on the open operation panel Is the document processor Close the document processor open Is the top cover of the Close the top cover of the document document processor open processor Left cover is open Is the left cover open Close the left cover The job is cancel
85. 1 Print All pages in range ich oir page Scale to paper size No Scaling C Cea Quick Print Basic Layout Imaging Publishing Advanced Paper Print size Media type Unspecified v Source Destination Auto source selection m Printer default v Orientation Duplex Portrait y Print on both sides C Landscape fy Flip on long edge E Rotated Flip on short edge Quality 1 z C EcoPrint F Collate PT C Print preview Create a document using an application Click File and select Print in the application The Print dialog box appears Click the V button next to the Name field and select this machine from the list Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of copies box Enter any number up to 999 When there is more than one document select Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of the page numbers Click Properties button The Properties dialog box appears Select the Basic tab and click Page Size button to select the paper size To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency click the Media Type menu and select the media type 3 16 Basic Operation 7 Click Source and select the paper source NOTE If you choose Auto source selection papers are supplied automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of optimum size and type To print on special paper such as envelope or thick paper place it on t
86. 2 Default Screen 8 5 Density Adjustment Copy 3 8 send 5 13 Destination 8 105 Adding 8 105 Adding a Group 8 110 Choosing by One Touch Key 3 28 Choosing from the Address Book 3 26 Editing 8 114 One touch Key 8 116 Search 3 26 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending 3 28 Developer unit 1 4 Device 7 19 Checking Status 7 19 Configuring 7 20 DHCP Appendix 22 Document Box 6 1 Document Processor Appendix 21 How to Load Originals 2 55 Loading Originals 2 55 Not Supported Originals 2 55 Supported Originals 2 55 Document processor 1 5 Document processor open close handle 1 6 dpi Appendix 22 Duplex 3 12 8 79 Duplexer front cover 1 4 DVD ROM 2 2 Index E EcoPrint Mode Appendix 22 Copy 4 8 Print 8 77 E mail send as E mail 3 19 Embedded Web Server 2 28 Emulation Appendix 22 Selection 8 74 Energy Star Program xxvi Enter E mail Subject and Body 5 18 Entry Body 5 18 File Name 4 16 5 17 Subject 5 18 Error Handling 8 25 Error Messages 10 6 Expansion Memory Appendix 2 F File Format 5 10 File Name 4 16 File Separation 5 24 Front cover 1 4 FTP Appendix 23 FTP Encrypted TX 5 23 5 25 G GPL LGPL xxiii Grayscale 5 15 Appendix 23 H Handholds 1 5 Handholes 1 6 Image Quality Copy 3 7 Send 5 12 Included Guides 2 Inner tray 1 5 Installation Precautions xv Interface Block 8 146 IP Address Appendix 23 Index 2 IPP Appendix 23 J Job Available Status 7 2 Canceling 3 29 7 18 Checking
87. 2 x 8 1 2 A6 Duplex 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 A5 MP Tray Maximum 8 1 2 x 14 A4 Minimum 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 A6 Zoom Level Manual mode 25 to 400 1 increments Fixed magnifications 400 200 141 129 115 90 86 78 70 64 50 25 Printing A4R LetterR 40 42 sheets min Legal 33 sheets min Speed B5R 33 sheets min A5R AG6R 22 sheets min A4R LetterR 24 5 26 sheets min Legal 16 5 sheets min B5R 24 sheets min A5dR 21 sheets min First Print Time 9 5 seconds or less A4 feed from Cassette Warm up 22 seconds or less Time 22 C 10 seconds or less 71 6 F 60 Sleep 15 seconds or less Paper Front Cassette 500 sheets 80 g m Capacity 2 MP Tray 100 sheets 80 g m4 plain paper A4 Letter or less Output Tray Capacity 500 sheets 80 g m Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets can be set in one sheet increments Image Write System Semiconductor laser 1 beam Appendix 18 Stem scription Standard 256MB Maximum 768MB Interface USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed USB Host 1 Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Operating 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Environment Humidity 15 to 80 Altitude 8 200 feet 2 500 m or less Brightness 1 500 lux or less Dimension W x D x H 11 1 2 x 19 9 16 x 21 1 2 494 x 497 1 x 545 5 mm Without FAX 56 1 Ib 25 5 kg With FAX 56 76 b 25 8 kg Space Required W x D 11 1 2 x 25 7 8 494 x 656 1 mm when using MP tray Weight without toner con
88. 23 PESCHON aera E nud cadatnsnenisncuiau nae 5 24 e Scanning Image using Application cceeeees 5 25 5 1 Original Size Sending Functions Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning Be sure to select the original size before starting the sending process Choose the original size from the following groups of original size Original Letter Legal Statement Executive Officio Il A4 A5 A6 Sizes B5 B6 Folio 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 and Custom Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8 7 Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images Function Menu lt gt OK Color Selection O Original Size Original Image Exit Original Size Legal Statement 4 E O lt gt OK Press the Send key Place the original Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Original Size Press the OK key Original Size appears Press the A or V key to select the desired original size and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settin
89. 24 eeu onesies be ee eee okedte Sele eee wees ew bod akties ete ad 2 2 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables 0 0 0000 eee 2 3 Connecung CADES sain Gains ea aR Sek Geum ae Sr ees Sb isi Sea es Rake aa wins BEES 2 5 POWer OM Olesen i Hsien il pie Gs Dae ea nn ee ener iene tee ee 2 6 Auto Low Power Mode 0 0c ccc eee eee etna 2 8 Sleep and Auto Sleep 8 2h bots waht Edd nh dee tee bad bead eek ed oe bette 2 8 Switching the Language for Display Language 0 00 0 cece ee ees 2 9 Selno Dateand MMEren a a alee Me oS oe dad woe Bk ee ee Bed 2 11 Network Setup LAN Cable Connection 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee 2 14 MSANI SOWIE j rrai devant dun gh ee kd ote dee bet mee dri ged db bt a add 2 16 Embedded Web Server Settings for E mail nnna anaana eee 2 28 SOIC EVI a th col a a cet als ire fal eae e ah Mech a a a aah hae See Seek ta eae 2 29 Preparation for sending a document toa PC 2 ee ees 2 31 Load PADO ict coe mh cere tea ioe te hath que ee ae Da Ade oe em eben aN E as 2 41 LOAGINGOMIGINAIS si 8 src gsr iritisa a So Ad GS Oe a Sak Bd ese BS Sega Bee dn Bee 2 54 3 Basic Operation EOOIN LM OGOUL 1g a2 eeu ede e T B Oe Oe UE Se eee eS Ui COPE EU OE oe Gees 3 2 One Touch Keys and Program KeyS 000 ce ee eee eee ene 3 3 WeSSage DISDIAW t0 0 6 0 Gin d dee Pa i aha Sats ook he ale OE ed we a ee 3 6 CODY NG ara Seta cas a ct ae bed asd ce ap aes Sagat A a ors yates agen old na
90. 3 Basic Operation Describes the procedures for basic copying printing and scanning Chapter 4 Copying Functions Describes the functions you can use when copying Chapter 5 Sending Functions Describes the functions you can use when sending originals Chapter 6 Document Box Provides a basic guide to using document boxes Chapter 7 Status Job Cancel Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to pause or resume jobs being printed or waiting to print Also explains how to check the device status Chapter 8 Default Setting System Menu Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation Chapter 9 Maintenance Describes cleaning and toner replacement Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Explains how to handle error messages paper jams and other problems Chapter 11 Management Explains user login administration and job accounting Appendix Explains how to enter characters and lists the machine specifications Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine Provides information on media types and paper sizes Also includes a glossary of terms XXIV Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description C oomen Sesriem Bold Indicates the operation panel Press the Start key keys or a computer screen Regular Indicates a selection item on the Select System Message Display Italic Indicates a message di
91. 3 Place the original on the platen and press the Start key Transmission starts 3 25 Specifying Destination Basic Operation When specifying destination choose from the Address Book or use the One touch keys Choosing from the Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book Select Addr Book gt m address Book ext Address Book Exit Address Book Sa OK eeDesign amp Fiala amp Maury amp Fiala 0667640000 MAfialaQ HHHEHHEHHH IE SMB PC Menu Destination Search 1 In the basic screen for sending press the Address Book key The Select Addr Book menu appears Press the A or V key to select Address Book and then press the OK key Address Book appears To use an address book on the LDAP server select Ext Address Book NOTE If extended address book is not registered Select Addr Book is not displayed 3 Press the A or V key to select the desired user or group and then press the OK key If you select a user the list of destinations registered to the user appears If you select a group proceed to step 5 Press the A or V key to select the desired destination and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below 3 26 Basic Operation Search in Address Book 1
92. 4 Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Collate Duplex 4 Press the A or V key to select Paper Selection 4 4 Copying Functions 5 Press the OK key Paper Selection appears Paper Selection lt 0 1jA4 p Plain a5 p Plain 6 Press the A or V key to select MP Tray Set 7 Press the OK key MP Tray Set appears MP Tray Set Sa OK 0 Standard Size Size Entry 8 Press the A or V key to select Standard Size or Size Entry and press the OK key select the desired paper size and then press the OK key If you select Size Entry using the numeric keys to enter Size Entry Y SW the Y vertical size and press the OK key and then enter 5 83 14 02 the X horizontal size and press the OK key ii 9 Press the A or V key to select the desired paper type Media Type and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Transparency basic screen for copying Rough 10 Place paper in the multi purpose tray 11 Press the Start key to start copying If Add paper in MP tray is displayed during the copying process add paper in the multi purpose tray and then press the OK key Copying then resumes NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 5 Copying Functions Original Orientation Select
93. 6 Press the OK key Buzzer appears 01 Key Confirmation 7 Press the A or V key to select Key Confirmation Job finish Ready 8 6 Key Confirmation Display Bright Set the brightness of the display Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness Sys Menu Count gt 0 system User Job Account 05 Common Settings Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound Exit Display Bright lt gt Darker 1 Lighter 1 Original Paper Settings 1 Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper Custom Original Size Setup Default Setting System Menu Press the OK key Key Confirmation appears Press the A or V key to select On or Off Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Buzzer menu In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Display Bright Press the OK key Display Bright appears Press the A or V key to select the display brightness from Darker 3 to Lighter 3 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu Set up frequently used custom original size The dimensions available are as follows 8 7 The table below lists the sizes that can be registered Inch models Default Setting System Menu X 1 97 to 14 02 in 0 01 incr
94. 8 69 e Auto Paper Selection 8 70 e Auto Priority 8 71 e Select Key Set 8 72 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Photo Processing Set the resolution for copying a photo a a a Dithering Normal Sets the resolution to standard Dithering Rough Sets the resolution to low Use the procedure below to set Photo Processing 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt gt select Copy User Job Account Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Copy menu appears Photo Processing Paper Selection AutoPaperSelect Exit Press the A or V key to select Photo Processing 4 Press the OK key Photo Processing appears Photo Processing lt gt 0o Dithering Normal Dithering Rough 5 Press the A or V key to select Dithering Normal or Dithering Rough 8 68 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu Paper Selection Set the default paper selection The table below shows the available settings a a a Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals Def PaperSource Select paper source set by Default Paper Source refer to page 8 20 Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection R 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the
95. 88 is set to On the Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start key is pressed For more information refer to Confirm Destination Screen on page 3 25 3 20 Send to Folder SMB Send to Folder FTP Basic Operation Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server NOTE Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the Embedded Web Server is On For details refer to the Embedded Web Server Operation Guide Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters Send E mail Folder FAX Send to E mail IBFolder SMB BFolder FTP Host Name SMB RD Centeri Host Name FTP RD Centeri Path RD3 reporti 1 4 Press the Send key Displays the screen for sending Press the A or V key to select Folder SMB or Folder FTP Press the OK key Host Name SMB or Host Name FTP appears Enter the host name NOTE Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One touch keys Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 26 Press the OK key Path appears Enter the path name Consider that the share name but not the folder name on the destination PC has to be typed in Press the OK key Login User Name appears 3 21 Basic Operation 8 Enter the login user name You have to e
96. A or V key to select TIFF Print Press the OK key TIFF Print appears TIFF Print l0 Paper Size Image Resolution O Print Resolution O 7 Press the A or V key to select Paper Size Image Resolution or Print Resolution 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu XPS FitTo Page Select the XPS Fitlo Page default NOTE Refer to page 6 4 for XPS FitTo Page Use the procedure below to set the default XPS FitTo Page setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound EXit 8 56 Default Setting System Menu Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default lt M Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select XPS FitTo Page 6 Press the OK key XPS FitTo Page appears XPS FitTo Page ald OK 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu 2 in 1 Layout Select the default value for layout when 2 in 1 is selected for Combine Items available for the default value are as follows ptm ezerintion EH L
97. A or V key to select the image quality suited to the type of original 5 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen 6 Press the Start key Copying begins 3 9 Basic Operation Zoom Copying Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image The following zoom options are available Auto Zoom Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image suitably to the selected paper size Letter R Statement R 129 qn 141 a A5 70 0 Zoom Entry Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1 increments between 25 and 400 Standard Zoom Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications The following magnifications are available Model Zoom Level OriginalCopy Inch Standard 100 400 Max 200 129 Statement gt gt Letter Models 78 Legal gt gt Letter 64 Letter gt gt Statement 50 25 Min Other 141 A5 gt gt A4 115 B5 gt gt A4 90 Folio gt gt A4 86 A4 gt gt B5 70 A4 gt gt A5 Standard 100 400 Max 200 141 A5 gt gt A4 115 B5 gt gt A4 86 A4 gt gt B5 70 A4 gt gt Ad 50 25 Min Other 129 Statement gt gt Letter 90 Folio gt gt A4 78 Legal gt gt Letter 64 Letter gt gt Statement Metric Standard 100 400 Max 200 141 A5 gt gt A4 Models 115 B5 gt gt A4 90 Folio gt gt A4 86 A4 gt gt B5
98. AN Interface I F Block Set Security Level Restart Op Functions User Job Account User Login Set User Login Local User List IC Card Setting Group Auth NW User Property Job Account set Job Accounting Account Report Total Accounting Each Job Account Account List Detail Edit Delete add Account Default Setting Apply Limit Copy Print Count Counter Limit Continued on next page xi page 11 37 page 8 121 page 8 121 page 8 130 page 8 136 page 8 131 page 8 132 page 8 133 page 8 134 page 8 139 page 8 139 page 8 120 page 8 146 page 8 150 page 8 119 page 8 150 page 11 2 page 11 6 page 11 11 page 11 12 page 11 15 page 11 35 page 11 31 page 11 31 page 11 19 page 11 19 page 11 18 page 11 26 page 11 22 page 11 28 Unknown ID Job A page 11 13 System Menu User Property Counter key Common Continued from s ttings previous page Language page 8 3 Dietetic Siereeera page 8 5 Sound Buzzer page 8 6 FAX Speaker page 8 6 FAX Monitor page 8 6 Display Bright page 8 7 Orig Paper Set Custom Orig Size page 8 7 Def Orig Size page 8 9 Custom PaperSize page 8 10 Cassette L Seb page 8 12 Cassette 2 Set Page 8 12 Cassette 3 Set page 8 12 Cassette 4 Set page 8 12 MP Tray Set
99. CP IP IPv4 Setup NOTE Prior to the IP address entries obtain permission from the network administrator Use the procedure below to setup the TCP IP IPv4 setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select System and press the OK key Report Counter A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name password with administrator privileges to log in and Eee press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System menu appears system 0l Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit 8 121 Network Setting V0 TCP IP Settings NetWare AppleTalk Exit TCP IP Settings mMm IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit TCP IP Settings mMm TCP IP IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit IPv4 Setting ai OK Bonjour IP Address EXit 10 11 12 Default Setting System Menu Press the A or V key to select Network Setting Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select TCP IP Settings Press the OK key The TCP IP Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select TCP IP Press the OK key TCP IP appears Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP IP Settings menu Press the A or V key to select IPv4 Setting Press the OK key The IPv4 Setting
100. CR Ignore LF 5 Press the A or V key to select LF Only LF and CR or Ignore LF 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code character code ODH The table below shows the available settings The default setting is CR Only o O o Use the procedure below to specify a CR action 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count V M select Printer Common Settings Copy Printer 8 83 Default Setting System Menu 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR EXit 3 Press the A or V key to select CR Action 4 Press the OK key CR Action 0I CR Only LF and CR Ignore CR 5 Press the A or V key to select CR Only LF and CR or Ignore CR 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu Paper Feed Mode Set the default value of the paper feed direction used for the printer functions The default setting is Auto O e a Sets the paper feed direction automatically Sets the paper feed direction the same as in the previous printing operation Use the procedure below to set Paper Feed Mode R 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count V select Printer Common Settings Copy Print
101. Clear set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors Options are between 5 and 495 seconds every five seconds The default setting is 30 seconds If you set 0 as the time errors are not displayed NOTE If you select Off for Auto Error Clear the time display does not appear Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay A 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings System User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings W W Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Timer Setting and press the OK key 8 33 Default Setting System Menu A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name password with administrator privileges to log in and ee press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 4 The Timer Settings menu appears Timer Setting gt 0m Ol Err Clear Timer Sleep Timer PanelReset Timer Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Err Clear Timer 6 Press the OK key Err Clear Timer appears Err Clear Timer W W 5 495 MT lt lt 7 Press the A or V key to set the Error Clear Timer Set the amount of time before clearing errors in seconds You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed a
102. HCP 13 Press the OK key DHCP appears 14 Press the A or V key to select On or Off and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu 8 127 Bonjour Settings Default Setting System Menu Select whether or not to use Bonjour The default setting is Off Use the procedure below to specify the Bonjour setting 1 gt 0 Sys Menu Count Report Counter Login User Name Login Password Login System Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Network Setting lt 0 TCP IP Settings NetWare AppleTalk Exit TCP IP Settings mMm IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The System menu appears Press the A or V key to select Network Setting Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select TCP IP Settings Press the OK key The TCP IP Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select TCP IP 8 128 TCP IP Settings TCP IP IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting EXit IPv4 Setting ad OK DHCP Bonjour IP Address EXit Default Setting System Menu 8 Press the OK key TCP IP appears 9 Press the A or V key
103. History 7 8 Checking Status 7 2 Pause and Resumption 7 18 sending the Job Log History 7 13 Job Accounting 11 15 Managing the Copier Printer Counts 11 22 Restricting the Use of the Machine 11 23 Job Box 8 88 Job Retention Deletion 8 89 Quick Copy Jobs 8 88 Job Finish Notice 5 21 Copy 4 14 send 5 21 K KPDL Appendix 23 L Label Appendix 16 LAN Cable Connecting 2 5 Left cover 1 6 Legal Information xxii LINE connector 1 6 Login 3 2 11 5 Logout 3 2 11 5 Low Power Mode 2 8 Low Power Timer 8 39 Main power switch 1 6 Management 11 1 Job Accounting 11 15 User Login Administration 11 2 Monotype Imaging License Agreement xxv Multi Purpose MP Tray Appendix 23 Paper Size and Media 2 51 8 14 Multi purpose tray MP tray 1 5 Multi Sending Sending to Different Types of Index Destinations 3 28 N NetBEUI Appendix 23 NetWare 8 131 Appendix 23 Setup 8 131 Network Setup 2 14 Network Cable 2 4 Connecting 2 5 Network Interface 2 4 Network interface connector indicators 1 6 Network Security 8 139 Network Setup FTP Reception 8 136 HTTP 8 136 HTTPS 8 136 IPP over SSL 8 137 LAN Interface 8 120 LDAP 8 136 LPD 8 136 NetBEUI 8 136 NetWare 8 131 POP3 E mail RX 8 136 Raw Port 8 136 SMTP E mail TX 8 136 SNMP 8 136 TCP IP IPv4 8 121 TCP IP IPv6 8 130 8 133 8 134 O Open SSLeay xxiii Operation Panel 1 2 Operation panel 1 4 Option Expansion Memory Appendix 2 Overview Appendix 2 Paper Feeder Appen
104. In Address Book press Menu the Right Select key Address Book lt OK Menu appears ee Design 2 Press the A or V key to select Search Name and then press the OK key A search screen appears Detail Search Name 3 Enter the characters you want to search Search Name mall 4 Press the OK key The address book appears with the user that starts with the entered character string at the top 1 In Ext Address Book press Menu the Right Select key Menu appears 2 Press the A or V key to select Search and then press the OK key A search screen appears Select Detail 3 27 Basic Operation 3 Enter the characters you want to search If you press Menu the Right Select key and then the OK key Search by appears where you can specify the search key and match condition Select the desired item for each and then press the OK key 4 Press the OK key The address book appears with the user that starts with the entered character string at the top NOTE If you first open the extended address book the search screen appears first Then operate from step 3 Choosing by One Touch Key Select the destination using the One touch keys In the basic screen for sending or the destination entry screen press the one touch key where the destination is registered NOTE Refer to Adding a Destination on One touch Key on page 8 116 for more information on adding one touch keys Sending to Different Typ
105. K key 11 10 Management 3 Inthe delete confirmation screen press Yes the Left Select key The user is deleted and the screen returns to Local User List Enabling Disabling Group Authentication This enables group authentication using the LDAP server This menu can be used only when Netwk Authentic is selected as the user authentication method For details of LDAP server settings refer to the Operation Guide of the LDAP server Use the procedure below to enable group authentication NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit system Menu operation panel Counter Q 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account Sys Menu Count gt 00 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and 1 1 ee press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login The User Job Account menu appears Press the A or V key to select User Login Set User Job Account 0m User Login Set Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit 5 Press the OK key The User Login Set menu appears User Login Set Mm User Login Local User List Group Auth Exit 6 Press the A or V key to select Group Auth 11 11 Group Auth lt gt 0m Displaying Network Use
106. K key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu Press the A or V key to select Date Time Press the OK key Date Time appears Press the lt or gt key to move the cursor position press the A or V key to enter year month and day and then press the OK key 2 12 Date Time ai OK Hour Min Second Vales A5 Time Zone Greenwich Date Setting Sa OK Date Time Date Format Time Zone Date Format ai OK Month Day Year 02 Day Month Year Year Month Day EXit Preparation before Use 16 Press the lt or gt key to move the cursor position press the A or V key to enter hours minutes and seconds and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu 17 Press the A or V key to select Date Format 18 Press the OK key Date Format appears 19 Press the A or V key to select the desired display format and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu 2 13 Preparation before Use Network Setup LAN Cable Connection The machine is equipped with network interface which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP IP IPv4 TCP IP IPv6 IPX SPX NetBEUI IPSec and AppleTalk It enables network printing on the Windows Macintosh UNIX NetWare and other platforms The table below shows the items required for each of the settings Configure the printer s
107. LYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN BEMA BRAN m HHET RSA aE EERIE at om BRAE JATERA AEN EARRA CLASS 3B 7H BOHRA S JA HIANS CTEM EFS AIBL V HMTRT P LeBBRD MUELT lt C REL The label shown below is attached on the right side of the machine CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT Legal Restriction on Copying Scanning Copying Scanning the following items is proh It may be prohibited to copy scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner ibited and may be penalized by low It may not be limited to these items Do not knowingly copy scan the items that are not to be copied scanned Paper money Bank note Securities stamp Passport Certificate Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying scanning of other items not mentioned above xvii Legal and Safety Information Please read this information before using your machine This chapter provides information on the following topics e HCG al IMPOMMANO NM nenese entices Meeeeeeye tt XIX e Regarding Trade Names ccccccseeceseseeeseeseeeseeees XIX e Energy Saving Control Function ccccccsecseeeeeees xxiii e Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function ccccccceeeeeees xxiii Paper ROCVOINO arnesi xxiii e Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program xxiii e About this Operation GuIde cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees XXIV e Conventions in This Guide cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
108. MP Tray Set 8 14 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key The MP Tray Set menu appears MP Tray Set ai OK MP Tray Size MP Tray Type EXit 7 Press the A or V key to select MP Tray Size 8 Press the OK key MP Tray Size appears MP Tray Size ag OK 9 Press the A or V key to select the paper size 10 Press the OK key The screen returns to the MP Tray MP Tray Set pag OK Set menu MP Tray Size MP Tray Type 11 Press the A or V key to select MP Tray Type 12 Press the OK key MP Tray Type appears MP Tray Type Transparency Rough 13 Press the A or V key to select the paper type 14 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the MP Tray Set menu 8 15 Default Setting System Menu Paper Weight The machine is capable of printing under the optimum setting for the type of paper being used A different paper type setting can be made for each paper source including the MP tray Not only can preset paper types be selected but it is also possible for you to define and select customized paper types Paper type can be changed using the printing system driver and the operation panel The following types of paper can be used IMPORTANT If selecting the paper weight print quality may be poor because of improper fixing of toner Paper source source E R T Weight Displayed in Paper Type aoe Paper Operation Panel Duplex path ray Cassette Pan ves ves
109. Menu Count menu 8 2 e Switching the Language for Display Language 8 3 e Default Screen 8 5 e Sound 8 6 e Display Bright 8 7 e Original Paper Settings 8 7 e Switching Unit of Measurement 8 24 e Error Handling 8 25 e Date Timer 8 27 e Function Defaults 8 42 e Login Operation 8 66 e RAM Disk Mode 8 67 How to display the Sys Menu Count menu 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit system Menu operation panel Counter When you are performing user management and have Login User Name not logged in a login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password to log in Login Password l NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for Login details on entering characters 2 The Sys Menu Count menu appears Sys Menu Count 0m Counter system 8 2 Default Setting System Menu Switching the Language for Display Language You can select the language of the message display by following the procedure given below You can optionally download messages in other languages Contact your service technician for information 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings Language 3 Press the A or V key to select Language Default Screen Sound Exit 4
110. MicroType fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc are installed in this machine This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies The designations and will not be used in this Operation Guide XIX GPL LGPL This product contains GPL http www gnu org licenses gpl html and or LGPL http www gnu org licenses Igpl html software as part of its firmware You can get the source code and you are permitted to copy redistribute and modify it under the terms of GPL LGPL Open SSLeay License Copyright c 1998 2006 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit
111. P3 HTTP HTTPS select whether or not to SSL must be set to On in IPP and the number of the port to be used 8 136 Select whether or not to use LDAP Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP Select whether or not to E mail RX receive e mail using POPS Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP communicate using HTTPS SSL Setting on page 8 140 Select whether or not to use Default Setting System Menu Description Default Setting mestarin ging System n x O QO 3 3 On Port number 21 On Off x On Off x l l Off Port number 631 Default Setting System Menu IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use On IPP over SSL SSL must be set to On in SSL Setting on page 8 140 The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed x The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed Use the procedure below 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select System and press the OK key Report Counter A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and iii press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System menu appears 01l Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 4 Press the OK key T
112. Print Count Counter Limit EXit 8 Press the A or V key to select Copy Print Count 9 Press the OK key Copy Print Count appears Copy Print Count gt Total 10 Press the A or V key to select Total or Split 11 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Default Setting menu Restricting the Use of the Machine This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether Split or Total is selected for Managing the Copier Printer Counts on page 11 22 11 23 Management Restriction Items Split selected for Copier Printer Count Print Restriction Limits the number of sheets used for copying Copier Print Restriction Limits the number of sheets used for printing Printer scan Restriction Limits the number of sheets scanned excludes Others copying and sending fax Fax TX Limits the number of sheets sent by fax Only on Restriction products with the fax function installed Total selected for Copier Printer Count Restriction Limits the total number ee sheets used for copying and printing Scan Restriction Limits the number of sheets scanned excludes Others copying Fax TX Limits the number of sheets sent by fax Only on Restriction products with the fax function installed Applying Restriction Restriction can be applie
113. Proceed in the same way as in step 5 to add a user to Group or user names 10 Select the added user select the Modify and Read amp U GSES ESTE i execute permissions and then click the OK button Object name C scannerdata Group or user names jamessmith PC4050 ames smith SR Administrators PC4050 WAd ministrators Pemissions for james smith Allaw Deny Full control Modify Read amp execute List folder contents Read Leam about access control and permissions Apply Checking the Path Check the share name of the shared folder that will be the destination for the document 2 35 F pc4050 scannerdata 2 See more results pc4050 x HE Shutdown gt Ca Network PC4050 Organize Include in library Share with Burn New folder Fr Favorites ane T BE Desktop JE project 3 22 a Downloads Ji projectB 3 22 El Recent Places a a Preparation before Use Enter pc4050 in Program and File Search in the Start menu The Search Results screen opens In Windows XP click Search in the Start menu select All files and folders and search for the destination computer to which the file will be sent In Search Companion click Computers or people and then A computer on the network In the Computer name text box enter the name of the computer that you checked pc4050 and then click Search Click pc4050 scannerdata that appears in the search results In
114. TR 8 78 Duplex 8 79 Copies 8 80 Orientation 8 81 FormFeed Timeout 8 82 LF Action 8 82 CR Action 8 83 Paper Feed Mode 8 84 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Emulation Set Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers Selection of emulation This machine can emulate the following printers Line Printer IBM Proprinter DIABLO 630 EPSON LQ 850 PCL6 KPDL KPDL Auto 8 74 Use the procedure below to select the emulation Sys Menu Count lt Common Settings CoPy Printer Printer Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR EXit Emulation Set gt M PCL6 KPDL 07 KPDL Auto Default Setting System Menu 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Printer 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Press the A or V key to select Emulation Set 4 Press the OK key Emulation Set appears 5 Press the A or V key to select the printer you want to emulate 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu NOTE If you select KPDL or KPDL Auto the operation after selecting the emulation is different from others If you select KPDL refer to page 8 76 If you select KPDL Auto refer to page 8 76 8 75 Default Setting System Menu
115. The Measurement menu appears Measurement 5 Press the A or V key to select inch or mm 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu 8 24 Default Setting System Menu Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred The possible errors and what to do for the errors are as follows Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type ae Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Paper Mismatch Error Select the method to handle if the selected paper size or paper type does not match the paper size or paper type set in the paper source when printing from your computer O l ae Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm 01 Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Error Handling 4 Press the OK key The Error Handling menu appears Error Handling pata OK 0l DuplexPaperError PaperMismatchErr Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select DuplexPaperError 8 25 DuplexPaperError
116. Windows XP double click the computer pc4050 that appears in the search results Check the folder that appears Check the address bar The third and following text strings P should be entered for the path In Windows XP double click the scannerdata folder and check the address bar The text string to the right of the third backslash should be entered in Path Example scannerdata NOTE You can also specify a subfolder in the shared folder as the location where data is to be sent In this case share name name of folder in the shared folder should be entered for the Path In the example window above scannerdata projectA is the Path Configuring Windows Firewall for Windows 7 Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission NOTE Log on to Windows with administrator privileges 2 36 Checking file and printer sharing D 3 gt Control Panel System and Security gt x Search Control Panel Home Y Action Center am A an System and Security Review your computer s status and resolve issues Change User Account Conti Troubleshoot common computer problems Restore your computer to an earlier Network and Internet Windows Firewal Check firewall status Hardware and Sound Programs P 4 j User Accounts and Family System Safety i View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index Appearance and W Allow remote access
117. age and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 1 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending The scanned original is sent after being divided into files of one page each NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 24 Sending Functions Scanning Image using Application Be sure that you connect your PC with the machine using the USB cable and install the TWAIN or WIA Driver The scan can be carried out from any TWAIN or WIA compatible application program For details of installation for TWAIN or WIA driver refer to Quick Installation Guide IMPORTANT When scanning a document from a TWAIN or WIA compatible application set Auto Sleep to Off For this setting refer to Auto Sleep ON OFF on page 8 34 The following procedure is an example for scan operation using the TWAIN Driver Operate the WIA Drivers in the same manner 1 Connect your computer to the machine using a USB cable 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen 3 Use the TWAIN compatible application to scan from your computer NOTE When the login user name and password entry screen appears enter them and click the OK button 4 Choose the appropriate settings and click Scan The scanned data will be sent to your computer 5 25 Sending Functions 5 26 6 Document Box This chapter explains the typical p
118. ail lt E mail Address 4 7 t_maury GH HHFEHHFH l Edit 2 Press Edit the Right Select key An entry screen address Entry appears 3 Enter the e mail address NOTE Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One touch keys Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 26 4 Press the OK key The e mail address is registered Entering Folder SMB FTP Address Folder SMB Address The table below explains the items to be entered Host Name Host name or IP address of the 64 chars sending computer Path to the folder used to save 128 chars files E g User ScanData Login User Name User name for folder access 64 chars For example abcdnet james smith Login Password Password for folder access If you specify a port number other than the default 139 use the Host name port number format E g SMBhostname 140 8 107 Default Setting System Menu Folder FTP Address The table below explains the items to be entered Host Name Host name or IP address of the 64 chars sending computer Path to the folder used to save 128 chars files E g User ScanData Login User Name User name for folder access 64 chars For example abcdnet james smith Login Password Password for folder access Encryption lf secure communication is On encryption method can be selected from Auto DES 3DES and AES If you specify a port number other than the default
119. ally selected can be limited by media types If Plain is selected the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected Select All Media Types for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type used by Auto Selection 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm 0l Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set 4 Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears Orig Paper Set m 01 Custom Orig Size Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Media for Auto 6 Press the OK key Media for Auto appears Media for Auto Said OK All Media Type Transparency 7 Press the A or V key to select All Media Type or the paper type to be used for paper selection 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig Paper Set menu 8 19 Default Setting System Menu Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1 4 and Multi Purpose Tray NOTE Cassette 2 Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 are displayed when the optional paper feeder installed Use the procedure below to select the default paper s
120. always specify the media type setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2 49 The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 120 g m e Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 120 g m in the cassettes Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 120 g m NOTE Statement and A6 can only be used in cassette 1 1 Pull the cassette all the way out of the printer IMPORTANT When pulling the cassette out of the printer ensure it is supported and does not fall out Standard paper sizes are marked on the inside of the cassette M LTR LGL 2 Turn the paper size dial so that the size of the paper you are going to use appears in the paper size window NOTE When the paper size dial is set to OTHER the paper size must be set into the printer on the operation panel Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media on page 2 49 2 42 Preparation before Use 3 Pull the release lever on the left side guide and slide to the desired paper size 4 Ifyou are going to set paper that is longer than A4 pull out the extension cassettes pushing the lock lever one by one and adjust them to the desired paper size 5 Pull the release lever and slide the paper
121. and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE XX Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementatio
122. aper cut to the standard size or trade size for a specific grade of paper Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams which may cause excessive wear of the machine Mixed paper weight i e thickness may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly The recommended basis weight is between 60 and 120 g m for the cassettes and between 60 and 220 g m for the multi purpose tray Thickness Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper jams or with several sheets being supplied at once Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick The proper thickness is between 0 086 and 0 110 mm Moisture Content Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage Moisture affects how the paper is supplied the electrostatic changeability of the paper and how the toner adheres Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room High relative humidity causes paper to become damp making the edges expand so it appears wavy Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6 To maintain the right level
123. appears In Windows XP right click My Computer and select Properties The System Properties dialog box appears Click the Computer Name tab in the window that appears and check the computer name If there is a workgroup All characters appearing in Full computer name should be entered in Host Name Example PC4050 If there is a domain The characters to the left of the first dot in Full computer name should be entered in Host Name Example pc4050 After checking the computer name click the eS Close button to close the System Properties screen In Windows XP after checking the computer name click the Cancel button to close the System Properties screen Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows 1 From the Start menu select All Programs or Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt The Command Prompt window appears 2 31 Preparation before Use Re Command Prompt ce 2 Atthe Command Prompt enter net config workstation Microsoft Windows Version 6 1 7600 4 and then click Enter Copyright lt c gt 2669 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved C Users james smith gt net config workstation Computer name N PC4656 Full Computer name PO 4058 a a User name james smith Workstation active on NetBT_Tcpip_ XXXXXXXX XXXX XXRR RRRR XRRRRRRRRRRA CHAXRAXKRRXKRRRA Screen example user name james smith and domain name ABCDNET Software version Windows 7 U
124. ars Orig Paper Set gt M 0i Custom Orig Size Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Cassette 1 Set Cassette 2 Set Cassette 3 Set or Cassette 4 Set Follow the steps below when you select the main unit cassette Cassette 1 Operate in a similar fashion 8 12 Cassette 1 Set mMm Cassette 1 Size Cassette 1 Type Exit Cassette 1 Size 0m ISO B5 13 Envelope C5 04 Custom Cassette 1 Set mMm Cassette 1 Size Cassette 1 Type Exit Cassette 1 Type mMm oi Plain Rough Recycled Default Setting System Menu when you select an optional cassette Cassette 2 3 or 41 6 The Cassette 1 Set menu appears 7 Press the A or V key to select Cassette 1 Size 8 Press the OK key Cassette 1 Size appears 9 Press the A or V key to select the paper size 10 Press the OK key The screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set menu 11 Press the A or V key to select Cassette 1 Type 12 Press the OK key Cassette 1 Type appears 13 Press the A or V key to select the paper type 14 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set menu 8 13 Default Setting System Menu Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray Select size and media type for multi purpose tray Set up frequently used size and media type before use The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the tab
125. at home or work where you know and trust the people and devic Troubleshoot my network Windows Firewall state On Incoming connections Block all connections tc Preparation before Use 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System and Security and Allow a program through Windows Firewall 2 Click Change settings select the File and Printer Sharing checkbox and click OK 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System and Security and Check firewall status 2 Click Advanced settings 2 37 Preparation before Use 3 Click Inbound Rules Doman Probie O Preve ered a m 9 TOANE correctore Pal 2 rel aS 6 ae a DOO acoro comecnos fut Gs mat match sta oe atom Prevate Profs is Actwe i 4 Click New Rule f Acton Wow hep iB 08 E Otis Ain os By Cermectien Security Pies QB ernCache Connan Retreat TTP tn E Ucrtonang O terse Monte Cache Server Tt O hC ache Pee Dacarery A0 in Cinnet te s Network Preyecter TCP 9 Connect be s Network Proyector TCP Consect 00 s Natwest Projarnos WID Ee linser te a Network Propactor WD le Connect te s Network Propector WD Ex _ conet be o Netowort Properter WID Ex cenet te a Netmort Proyecto WD ln me i as 5 Select Port and click Next What type of mule would you ike to create O Pogam Pade that cortmis connections for a pogam res D SE ca Predefined BranchCache Cortert FRatieval Use
126. atically put paper out However no output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed Auto Paper Selection A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing Auto Sleep Mode A mode designed for electrical power saving activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a specific period In Sleep mode power consumption is kept to a minimum Bonjour Bonjour also known as zero configuration networking is a service that automatically detects computers devices and services on an IP network Bonjour because an industry standard IP protocol is used allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353 If a firewall is enabled the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets If Bonjour does not run stably check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour Default Gateway This indicates the device such as a computer or router that serves as the entrance exit gateway for accessing computers outside the network that you are on When no specific gateway is
127. below to set the form feed timeout 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Printer Common Settings Copy Printer 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select FormFeed Timeout 4 Press the OK key FormFeed Timeout appears FormFeed TimeOut W W 5 495 MTs lt lt 5 Press the A or V key to set the Form Feed Timeout You can set the timeout delay in seconds You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code character code OAH The table below shows the available settings The default setting is LF Only ae LF Only Only line feed performed LF and CR Line feed and character return performed Ignore LF No line feed performed Use the procedure below to specify a LF action 8 82 Default Setting System Menu 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Printer Common Settings Copy Printer 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer 01 Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR EXit Press the A or V key to select LF Action 4 Press the OK key LF Action appears LF Action ON LE Only LF and
128. box Dangerous sparks may cause burns S Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children S If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box avoid inhalation and ingestion as S well as contact with your eyes and skin e If you do happen to inhale toner move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water If coughing develops contact a physician e If you do happen to ingest toner rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach If necessary contact a physician e If you do happen to get toner in your eyes flush them thoroughly with water If there is any remaining tenderness contact a physician e If toner does happen to get on your skin wash with soap and water Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box S XV Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose
129. cee 1 While pressing down on the hooks x2 shown in the diagram lift up and remove the separation pad J INA y EA ae CS 9 9 Maintenance Install a new paper feed roller and separation pad 1 Remove the new separation pad and paper feed roller from the maintenance kit and follow the removal procedures in reverse to install 9 10 10 Troubleshooting This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine e Solving Malfunctions c cc ccceccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseees 10 2 e Responding to Error Me SSAQ S ccccceeeeeeeeneeeees 10 6 Clearing Paper SAIN Ses sicecda ies tcc ns wi yere een tecanal 10 13 Troubleshooting Solving Malfunctions The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving If a problem occurs with your machine look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages If the problem persists contact your Service Representative Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions sari The operation panel Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC does not respond outlet when the main power switch is turned on Pressing the Start key Is there a message on the Determine appropriate response to does not produce Message Display the message and respond copies accordingly Is the machine in Sleep Press the Power key to recover mode the machine from Sleep mode The machine will be ready to copy within 15
130. cessor The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals Both sides of two sided originals are scanned Originals Supported by the Document Processor The document processor supports the following types of originals Weight 50 to 120 g m duplex 50 to 110 g m Size Maximum A4 to Minimum A5 Maximum Legal to Minimum Statement Capacity Plain paper Colored paper Recycled paper High quality paper 50 sheets Thick paper 110 g m 36 sheets Thick paper 120 g m 33 sheets Art paper 1 sheet Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals e Soft originals such as vinyl sheets e Transparencies such as OHP film e Carbon paper e Originals with very slippery surfaces e Originals with adhesive tape or glue e Wet originals e Originals with correction fluid which is not dried e Irregularly shaped non rectangular originals e Originals with cut out sections e Crumpled paper e Originals with folds Straighten the folds before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam e Originals bound with clips or staples Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls wrinkles or creases before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam How to Load Originals IMPORTANT Before loading originals be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table Originals left on the original ej
131. ch off and back on If this error occurs several times make a note of the displayed error code and contact your service representative Refer to the corrective action for the error message An error has occurred 9181 The scanned original exceeds the acceptable number of pages of 999 Send the excess pages separately Error occurred System error has occurred Turn the Turn the main power main power switch off and on switch off and on Incorrect account ID The Account ID does not match Check the registered Account ID Put down the receiver The phone receiver is off the hook Hang Up canceled File is not found Job is canceled The specified file is not found The job is canceled Press the OK key The job is canceled Press the OK Key The job is canceled Press the OK key Remove paper from the inner tray and press the OK key to resume the job KPDL error Job is canceled Print overrun Job is Inner Tray is full of Paper Remove the paper 2 ch Unknown toner Is the installed toner We will not be liable for any damage Installed container our own brand caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine 10 10 Troubleshooting Check points Corrective Actions ie Unknown toner Does the installed toner Install the specified container Installed PC container s regional specification match the machines s Insufficient memory Further scanning cannot be Ca
132. counting on page 11 15 E mail Address The user can register his her E mail address The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E mail function Mandatory at user registration NOTE By default one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored The following are the default user s properties User Name DeviceAdmin Login User Name 4000 Login Password 4000 Access Level Administrator It is recommended to periodically change the user name login user name and login password regularly for your security Use the procedure below to register a new user NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account Sys Menu Count m0m User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit Login User Name Login Password Login User Job Account 0 User Login Set Job Account Set Unknown ID Job EXit User Login Set 2 Mm User Login Local User List IC Card Setting Exit Local User List Mm amp DeviceAdmin Detail Edit Delete add User User Name Management A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Se
133. ct the the desire print mode The print modes are as follows Paper Size scaled to fit the paper size Image Resolution matched to the image resolution Print Resolution matched to the print resolution Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu If you select On in this setting XPS data is scaled to fit the paper size during printing If you select of f the data is printed at its original size Function Menu 01 Collate lt gt OK Paper Selection O Duplex Exit XPS FitTo Page E lt gt OK 6 4 Follow steps 1 to 8 of Printing on page 6 2 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select XPS FitTo Page Press the OK key XPS Fitlo Page appears Press the A or V key to select Off or On Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen Document Box NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 6 5 Document Box Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine You can store files in PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS format NOTE The maximum number of the storable files is 100 Storing Documents The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained be
134. cting the Multi Purpose Tray Change the paper size and media type The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below Paper Standard Letter Legal Statement Executive Oficio Il Size Sizes A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 Folio 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 and Custom Inch models Horizontal 5 83 to 14 02 in 0 01 increments Vertical 2 76 to 8 50 in 0 01 increments Metric models Vertical 70 to 216 mm in 1 mm increments Horizontal 148 to 356 mm in 1 mm increments Media Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Type Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick High Quality Custom 1 to or i For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size Custom refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8 10 ii The input units can be changed in the System menu Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8 24 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8 refer to Paper Weight on page 8 16 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 21 NOTE You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 8 1
135. d Quick Copy Jobs The procedure for setting Quick Copy Jobs is explained below 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Document Box Send FAX Document Box 2 Press the OK key The Document Box menu appears Document Box 01 Sub Address Box Job Box Select Key Set Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Job Box 4 Press the OK key The Job Box screen appears 01i Quick Copy Jobs JobRet Deletion Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Quick Copy Jobs 6 Press the OK key The Quick Copy Jobs screen Quick Copy Jobs appears 0 50 EEEE o gt s 7 Enter the number of Quick Copy Jobs that can be saved with the numeric keys 8 88 Default Setting System Menu 8 Press the OK key The screen returns to the Job Box screen Job Retention Deletion The procedure for setting Job Retention Deletion is explained below 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Document Box Send FAX Document Box 2 Press the OK key The Document Box menu appears Document Box Sub Address Box Job Box Select Key Set Exit Press the A or V key to select Job Box 8 4 Press the OK key The Job Box screen appears JobRet Deletion Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select JobRet Deletion 6 Press the OK key The Job Retention Deletion screen JobRet Deletion gt appears
136. d Folder Displays the screen for sending 2 Press the A or V key to select E mail Folder SMB BFolder FTP 3 Press the OK key Address Entry appears Address Entry ot OK 4 Enter the destination e mail address NOTE Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One touch keys Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 26 5 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the Ready to send screen returns to the basic screen Dest 1 SALLYCHRREHRFEERHF NOTE If the screen for confirming the entry of a new destination page 8 88 is set to On a screen to confirm the 1 sided 300x300dp1 Duplex ScanRes entered e mail address appears Enter the same e mail address again and press the OK key 6 If there are additional destinations press the Add Destination key Repeat steps 2 to 5 to enter additional destinations Up to 100 destinations can be specified 3 19 Basic Operation 7 Press the Confirm Destination key to confirm the registered destinations R Press the A or V key to select a destination and press Dest Contiim lt lt 0 the OK key Then you can edit or delete the destination MIMorganG tt tt iit tit tH F MaaaaaaaaaGHHHtHtee Press Exit the Right Select key to return to the basic screen Mbbbbbbbbb F HH Exit 8 Press the Start key Transmission starts NOTE If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission page 8
137. d in two modes as follows ee No restriction given Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 copies Reject Usage Restriction is applied Use the procedure below to select a restriction method 1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of Managing Accounts on page 11 18 2 In Account List press the A or V key to select the Account List V 0 account to which you want to set restriction of use and SeUI R amp D DEP then press the OK key amp eCGUI Design eeRD Center 11 24 Management 3 Press the lt or gt key to select the item to be restricted Detail 0 and then press Edit the Right Select key Print Restrict 4 6 Total Off When selecting Split in Copy Print Count screen changes Detail 0 as shown in the left Print Restrict 4 7 Copier Off F 4 Press the A or V key to select the desired restriction Print Restrict V m method and then press the OK key Counter Limit Reject Usage If you select Counter Limit enter the upper limit number Limit Pages T of pages in the next screen and then press the OK key 1 9999999 IWCLTohemm ages 5 Repeat step 3 to 4 to set items as necessary 6 Press the OK key again A confirmation screen appears Overwrite Are you sure eGUI DESIGN Yes 7 Press Yes the Left Select key The restriction of use is changed Registered is displayed and the screen returns to Account List
138. d to log in to the operating system This completes the printing system driver installation Next specify the print settings If an IP AppleTalk or Bonjour connection is used the settings below are required If a USB connection is used the printer is automatically recognized and connected 8 Open System Preferences and click Print amp Fax aac System Preferences Personal w u M E o Appearance Desktop amp Dock Expos amp Language amp Security Spotlight Screen Saver Spaces Text Hardware a A E3 E W O bes CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard Mouse Print amp Fax Sound Saver Internet amp Wireless e 0 MobileMe Network Bluetooth Sharing System A I Ask 1 u C Q Accounts Date amp Time Parental Software Speech Startup Disk Time Machine Universal Controls Update Access 9 Click the plus symbol to add the installed printing system driver Boar Print amp Fax os bye Open Print Queue i s E Options amp Supplies idle i Location e d Kind Status Idle Cl Share this printer on the network Sharing Preferences Default printer Last Printer Used Default paper size A4 re rr Click the lock to prevent further changes 10 Click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the IP address and printer name When you click the AppleTalk icon for an AppleTalk connection
139. de 6 9 Status Job Cancel Checking JOO Status 24 ren te A hah Bee eS Ae Gee es wk Ghee aa 7 2 CHECKING JOD HISTO ress spad cates seaeehsanket a a sea ad eee ae eet eee wats 7 8 Sending ine Jop LOG HIStory ersari iesire oee ees Pha ee ooh eee eo a a ks 7 13 Pause and Resumption of JobS 0 0 cc eee eens 7 18 CancelinG OF JODS 42x55 tease esta hee eet CA dS eRe eee wee a SS KG Reo 7 18 Device Communication 0 0 0 cc eee ee eee eens 7 19 Default Setting System Menu COMMON SCUINGS ariere Tir eee es oe Se es Se ek eee eee ees 8 2 CODY SENOS su iot ote Seu Jou ne bee ad Die tem e a See eee Shas whew ded i 8 68 Printer SCMINGS sasie viet oe iba ede oe hae ee cee ee ere ees 8 74 SeNdING SCUINGS iets wa oe oe Aree See ee ode eee SER ee oe eee eee 8 86 Document BOX Settings annaa cea dete eae bet eon wie eden bea Ree 8 88 Printing Reports Sending Notice 1 0 0 ee eens 8 93 Adjustment Maintenance 0 0 0 0 0 ee eee ee eee 8 98 Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 0 0 000s eae 8 105 Restarting the System 0 et eee eee eee 8 119 Netwoik SetU D aeta aea ae 4 ot oer eee oes oh oe eae te eee ae eee eet eed 8 120 Network OCCU ys etn deta a a a ie hae deat eek ea Sew s 8 139 Interface Block Setting 4 25 c g eek oe we Sd We eee ee ho ed eh eh ORS Shak Ye 8 146 security Level Security Level setting 0 0 0 0 ccc ee ene 8 150 Optional FUNCIONS s mie cts eet Serer neg
140. default setting is On and that of Rule Setting is also Off Use the procedure below to make the setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select System and press the OK key Report Counter A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name password with administrator privileges to log in and PT press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System menu appears System Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 4 Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Network Setting W W WSD SCAN WSD PRINT IPSec 5 Press the A or V key to select IPSec 8 139 Rule Setting SSL Setting Default Setting System Menu Press the OK key IPSec appears Press the A or V key to select On or Off If you select On and press the OK key Rule Setting appears Press the A or V key to select On or Off Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu This allows you to use SSL network security for communication You can use SSL Setup to select whether or not SSL is used and to specify the IPP port and HTTP port security settings SSL Make this setting Make this setting when you use SSL The default setting is Off Use the procedure below to make the setting 1 Sys Menu Cou
141. der 4 10 Copying Functions Types of Page Boundary Lines The following types of the boundary lines are available Dotted Positioning Mark The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Collate Duplex 4 Press the A or V key to select Combine 5 Press the OK key Combine appears 6 Press the A or V key to select 2 in1 or 4 in 1 7 Press Detail the Right Select key N 8 Press the A or V key to select the desired layout and 2 in 1 Layout lt 0 then press the OK key 0 L to R HT to B Solid Line Dotted Line Orig Orientation iTop Edge Top 10 11 Copying Functions Press the A or V key to select the desired border line type and then press the OK key Press the A or V key to select the orientation of the original and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying Press the Start key Scanning begins If the original is placed on the platen replace the original and press the Start key After scanning all originals press End Scan the Right Select key to start copying NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu Copying Functions Continuous Scan When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document proces
142. designated for a destination IP address data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP that automatically resolves IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses on a TCP IP network DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned dpi dots per inch A unit for resolution representing the number of dots printed per inch 25 4 mm EcoPrint Mode A printing mode that helps save toner Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal Emulation The function to interpret and execute other printers page description languages The machine emulates operation of PCL6 KC GL KPDL and KPDL automatic Appendix 22 FTP File Transfer Protocol A protocol to transfer files on the TCP IP network whether the Internet or an intranet Along with HTTP and SMTP POP FTP is now frequently used on the Internet Grayscale A computer color expression Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray varying from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest without any other colors Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels that is white and black only for 1 bit 256 gray levels including white and black for 8 bits and 65 536 gray levels for 16 bits IP Address
143. dix 2 Optional Functions 8 150 Original Loading in the Document Processor 2 55 Placing on the Platen 2 54 Original eject table 1 6 Original Orientation Copy 4 6 Document Processor 4 6 Index 3 send 5 8 Original Size Selection Send 5 2 Original SSLeay License xxiv Original stopper 1 6 Original table 1 6 Original width guides 1 6 Originals Copy 4 2 Custom 8 7 Setup 8 7 Size Selection 4 2 5 2 P Paper Appropriate Paper Appendix 12 Auto Selection 8 19 Before Loading 2 41 Cassette 8 12 Custom 8 10 Default Paper Source 8 20 Loading Envelopes 2 47 Loading in the Cassettes 2 42 Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 2 45 Multi Purpose Tray 8 14 Setup 8 7 Size and Media 2 49 Appendix 9 Special Paper 8 21 Appendix 14 Specifications Appendix 11 Weight 8 16 Paper Feeder Appendix 2 Paper guage 1 4 Paper Jam 10 13 Cassette 1 10 14 Document Processor 10 17 Duplexer 10 15 Jam Location Indicators 10 13 MP Tray 10 14 Paper Feeder 10 14 Precaution 10 13 Rear Unit 10 17 Paper length guide 1 5 Paper Selection 4 3 Cassette 4 3 Multi Purpose Tray 4 4 Paper size dial 1 5 Paper width adjusting tab 1 5 Paper width guide 1 5 Index Paper width guides MP tray 1 5 Part Names 1 1 Platen 1 4 Placing Originals 2 54 POP3 Appendix 23 PostScript Appendix 23 Power Cable Connecting 2 9 Power cord connector 1 6 Power Off 2 7 Power On 2 6 PPM Appendix 23 Preparation 2 1 Preparing Cables 2 4 Printer Setup 8 74 Printing Sys
144. dlers in preview pane Use Sharing Wizard Recommended Automatically type into the Search Box Select the typed item in the view W vr Restore Defaults OK Canoe Apply 2 32 Preparation before Use In Windows XP click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Simple File Sharing Recommended in Advanced settings 3 Click the OK button to close the Folder Options screen Advanced Sharing Share name scannerdata Remove Limit the number of simultaneous users to Comments Permissions for scannerdata Share Penissions Group or user names Pemissions for Everyone Full Control Change Read Create a folder on the local disk C NOTE For example create a folder with the name scannerdata on the local disk C Right click the scannerdata folder and click Share and Advanced sharing Click the Advanced Sharing button The scannerdata Properties dialog box appears In Windows XP right click the scannerdata folder and select Sharing and Security or Sharing Select the Share this folder checkbox and click the Permissions button The Permissions for scannerdata dialog box appears In Windows XP select Share this folder and click the Permissions button Click the Add button 2 33 Preparation before Use r 5 Enter the user name in the text box and click the OK Select Users or Groups button Sel
145. e Kemove sortware Advanced Tools Hardware Documentation Software Documentation Software Release Notes Select Language Install drivers and utilities Copyright c 2010 From this point the procedure differs depending on your version of Windows and your connection method Proceed to the correct procedure for your connection type e Express Mode e Custom Mode Express Mode In Express Mode the installer automatically detects the printer when it is turned on Use Express Mode for standard connection methods 1 Inthe installation method selection window select Express Mode The print system detection window appears and the installer detects the connected printers If the installer does not detect a print system check that the print system is connected via USB or a network and that it is turned on Then click Refresh to search print system again NOTE While the information shown in Windows Vista and Windows 7 Windows XP installation dialog boxes differs slightly the installation procedure is the same Installer Choose how to install the software Express Mode Install the recommended printing software The printing system must be connected Custom Mode Create a custom installation Utilities Install printing system utilities only 2 Select the printer you want to be installed and click Next Preparation before Use NOTE If the Found New Hardware Wizard appears click Cancel If a hardware installatio
146. e Name Has the Login Password Check the login password been entered properly Have exceptions for Configure exceptions for Windows 2 3 Windows Firewall been Firewall properly configured properly Do the time settings for the Set the equipment domain server equipment domain server and data destination computer to and data destination the same time computer differ Is the touch panel displaying Refer to Responding to Send Error 10 6 Send error You can also enter a full computer name as the host name for example pc001 abcdnet com You can also enter login user names in the following formats Domain_name user_name for example abcdnet james smith User_name domain_name for example james smith abcdnet 10 5 Troubleshooting Responding to Error Messages If the control panel displays any of these messages follow the corresponding procedure Alphanumeric Check points Corrective Actions are mi paper in cassette Is the indicated cassette out Load paper of paper Load paper in MP Is the paper of the selected Load the paper in the multi purpose Tray size loaded in the multi tray which is of the size and type purpose tray indicated on the Message Display Add toner Is the displayed message Replace the toner container accompanied by a lit error LED Check waste toner Prepare the waste toner box box Waste toner box is full Replace the waste toner box Check cassette
147. e f you change Date Time setting trial functions will be unavailable Are you sure message is displayed To change the date time press Yes the Left Select key 8 28 Default Setting System Menu Date Format Select the display format of year month and date The year is displayed in Western notation Use the procedure below to select the date format 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings 01 Language Default Screen Sound EXit 3 Press the A or V key to select Date Setting and press 8 the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and Pe press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 4 The Date Settings menu appears Date Setting lt gt 0m Date Time Date Format Time Zone EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Date Format 6 Press the OK key Date Format appears Date Format Cmd OK Month Day Year 02 Day Month Year Year Month Day Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select Month Day Year Day Month Year or Year Month Day 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu 8 29 Default Setting System Menu Time Zone Set the
148. e paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity 2 Auto Low Power Mode Preparation before Use Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for 2 minutes Sleep and Auto Sleep Sleep Power OK Auto Sleep To enter Sleep press the Power key Message Display and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator This status is referred to as Sleep If print data is received during Sleep the print job is performed while the Message Display remains unlit If you are using the products equipped with the fax function received fax data is printed out while the operation panel also remains unlit To resume press the Power key The machine will be ready to operate in about 15 seconds Note that ambient environmental conditions such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep Mode if left idle for 15 minutes 2 8 Preparation before Use Switching the Language for Display Language Select the language displayed on the Message Display Use the procedure below to select the language 1 Turn on the main power switch 2 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit operation panel System Menu Counter When you are performing user management and have Log
149. e the destination folder For setting up the PC Folder contact your administrator Detailed transmission settings to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the image at the same time Follow the steps below for basic sending The following four options are available send as E mail Sends a scanned original image as an E mail attachment page 3 19 Send to Folder SMB Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC page 3 21 send to Folder FTP Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server page 3 21 Image Data Scanning with TWAIN WIA Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program page 5 25 NOTE Different sending options can be specified in combination Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending on page 3 28 3 18 Basic Operation Send as E mail Sends a scanned original image as an E mail attachment NOTE e You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server It is recommended 3 that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any time over a LAN e Access the Embedded Web Server beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e mail For details see Embedded Web Server Settings for E mail on page 2 28 e Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Press the Send key E mail Fold i Sen
150. e the values automatically set after the warm up is completed or the Reset key is pressed Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending Setting the frequently used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier Color Selection Select the default color mode setting The available default settings are shown below Full Color Scan document in full color Grayscale Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish Black amp White Scan document in black and white Use the procedure below to select the default color mode setting 1 Sys Menu Count 0m system User Job Account 05 Common Settings Common Settings mMm 01 Language Default Screen Sound Exit Function Default mMm 01 Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution EXit Color Selection lt gt oN Full Color Grayscale Black amp White In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Function Default Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Press the A or V key to select Color Selection Press the OK key Color Selection appears 8 42 Default Setting System Menu 7 Press the A or V key to select Full Color Grayscale or Black amp White 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu Scan Resol
151. e to see the complete job name Press the OK key to return to the original screen When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information When there is only one destination press Detail the Right Select key in Destination to see the complete destination name Press the OK key to return to the original screen When there are two or more destinations press List the Right Select key in Destination to display the destination list Press the A or V key to select the desired destination and press the OK key This displays the complete name of the destination Press the OK key to return to the destination list Pressing Exit the Right Select key while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original screen Displaying Store Job Log Status Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status Pause Store Job Log 0008 sScan 0009 maury s data A 0010 aaaa 0009 Detail Result Error 10200 Detail AN Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu appears Press the A or V key to select Store Job Log Press the OK key Store Job Log appears Press the A or V key to check the store queue A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job OK Job completed normally Job error Job aborted NOTE For details of other items refer to Store Job Status screen on page 7 6 Press the OK key or Detail the Right Sel
152. e used in the multi purpose tray specify the paper size When using other than a plain paper specify the media type re ae Paper Standard Size Sizes Size Entry Media Type 8 16 Select from the standard sizes Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size Letter Legal Statement Executive and Oficio II Metric size A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 Folio 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 and Custom Enter the size not included in the standard size Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size X Horizontal 5 83 14 02 in 0 01 increments Y Vertical 2 16 8 50 in 0 01 increments Metric size X Horizontal 148 356 mm in 1mm increments Y Vertical 70 216 mm in 1mm increments Selectable media types are as follows Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick High Quality and Custom 1 8 To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page 2 51 Preparation before Use NOTE If using the products equipped with fax function and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX the available media types are as shown below Plain Recycled Bond Color High Quality and Rough 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main uni
153. eae aid ate Md E Index 1 Contents Quick Guide Be sure to read Legal and Safety Information before using this machine Administrator tasks To make copies To print EN Simply press the Start key to make z You can print via a network or print nE copies You can also fine tune the A a PDF file directly from USB It copies It prints copy settings by changing the memory Ee paper size adjusting the density _ etc Printing Documents Print Copying with specific via a network Connecting Cables Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Install the printing system driver on your Stored in Removable USB Memory settings computer 2 16 Placing Originals on the Platen 2 54 Loading Paper 2 41 Printing Printing Copying Functions Documents Stored Printing from Operation 4 1 in USB Memory Applications 6 2 3716 Administrator tasks To send documents You can send scanned images via a network Or you can also store scanned images in USB memory A Itsends Send Send to as Folder E mail SMB Saving Documents to USB Memory Connecting Cables Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Plug the USB memory Create a shared folder on the destination computer 2 31 Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 8 105 Place the originals on the platen Sending 3 18 1 Saving Documents Operation to USB Memory Scan to USB 6 6
154. ear on the copies when the document processor used Paper feed direction De The table below shows the available settings Oe e No correction performed n Low Correction performed The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using Off Correction performed Select this item if black streak remains after using On Low The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using On Low NOTE Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters It is recommended to keep the default Off Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Adjust Maint Document Box i Edit Destination Adjust Maint 8 100 Default Setting System Menu 2 Press the OK key The Adjust Maint menu appears Adjust Maint gt 0m Copy Denst Adj Send Box Density Correct Bk Line EXit 3 Press the A or V key to select Correct Bk Line 4 Press the OK key Correct Bk Line appears Correct Bk Line o gt On Low On High 5 Press the A or V key to select Off On Low or On High 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the 8 screen returns to the Adjust Maint menu New Developer When the printing is too light or incomplete even though there is enough toner refresh the developer 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A o
155. eck of Device Status 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu Status lt 0 appears Store Job Log Scanner Printer Pause 2 Press the A or V key to select Scanner Printer or FAX 3 Press the OK key This displays the status of the device Scanner selected in step 2 Ready Printer Processing 4 Press the OK key The screen returns to the Status menu The items you can check are described below Scanner The information scanning pausing etc is displayed Printer Information waiting printing etc is displayed FAX The information sending waiting etc is displayed 7 19 Outgoing FAX Log Incoming FAX Log Outgoing FAX Rpt Handling the Devices USB Memory Status Paper Status 13 Memory Card USB Memory Pause USB Memory Capacity 512 0MB Remove USB memory can be safely removed Status Job Cancel If you press Log the Right Select key the Log menu appears From this screen you can check or print the transmission reception history NOTE If you are using a user management function the menu for printing the transmission reception history appears only when you have logged in as an administrator 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu appears 2 Press the A or V key to select USB Memory 3 Press the OK key This displays the status of the USB memory Press the lt or gt key to switch the displa
156. ect Original Size Press the OK key Original Size appears Original Size pai OK Legal 4 Statement 4 6 Press the A or V key to select the desired original size and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying 7 Press the Start key to start copying NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 2 Copying Functions Paper Selection Select the paper source that contains the required paper size NOTE Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette refer to Original Paper Settings on page 8 7 Selecting the Cassette Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu Sa OK Paper Selection O Collate Duplex 4 Press the A or V key to select Paper Selection Press the OK key Paper Selection appears Paper Selection 0m 2 Letter Plain Custom Plain 6 Press the A or V key to select the desired paper size If Auto is selected the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically 7 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying 8 Press the Start key to start copying NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 3 Copying Functions Sele
157. ect key to check the detailed information of the selected job 7 11 Status Job Cancel Press the lt or gt key to switch the display to other information items The items displayed are as follows Result Accepted Time End Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages number of pages of the original Color B amp W color mode of the original sender Info destination information When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press Detail the Right Select key in Job Name to see the complete job name Press the OK key to return to the original screen When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press Detail the Right Select key in Sender Info to see the complete destination information Press the OK key to return to the original screen 12 Status Job Cancel Sending the Job Log History You can send the job log history by e mail You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached Displaying Job Log History Menu R 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit Sys Menu Count V 0m operation panel The Sys Menu Count menu appears Counter System When you are performing user management and have Login User Name not logged in a login screen will appear Then enter the ly Pad ee ee user ID and password to log in Login Password NOTE Refer to Character Ent
158. ect table may cause the new originals to jam 1 Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals 2 55 Preparation before Use 2 Place the originals Put the side to be scanned or the first side of two sided originals face up Slide the leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go IMPORTANT Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals If there is a gap readjust the original width guides The gap may cause the originals to jam Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam see the figure Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the holes or perforations will be scanned last not first 2 56 3 Basic Operation This chapter explains the following operations si OOM OG OUT orense wencet eianeeceesnasels e One Touch Keys and Program Keys e Message Display CODVING groszsesesmsescnesnsiritorlusnntabovelovosdetunnioenss e Printing Printing from Applications e Sending e Confirm Destination Screen e Specifying Destination e Canceling Jobs e Checking Remaining Toner and Paper 3 1 Basic Operation Login Logout If user login administration is enabled it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine NOTE You will be unable to log in if you forget your login user name or login password In this event log
159. ect this object type Users Groups or Builtin security principals Object Types From this location PC4050 Locations Enter the object names to select examples 6 Select the entered user select the Change and Read Permissions for scannerdata i permissions and click the OK button Share Penissions Group or user names In Windows XP go to step 8 amp Everyone 3 Pca050 PC4050 james smith Femissions for jarmmes smith Allaw Deny Full Control Change Read Leam about access control and permissions NOTE Everyone gives sharing permission to everyone on the network To strengthen security it is recommended that you select Everyone and remove the Read permission checkmark 7 Click the OK button in the Advanced Sharing screen to close the screen 2 34 Preparation before Use 8 Click the Security tab and then click the Edit button scannerdata Properties Gener Shaina Secuty Previous veson Coe _ In Windows XP click the Security tab and then click the Object name C scannerdata Add button Group or user names R SYSTEM 3 PCO391 PC4050 james smith Administrators PC4050 WAd ministrators To change permissions click Edit Pemnissions for SYSTEM Allow Deny Full contral Modify Read amp execute List folder contents Read Write For special permissions or advanced settings click Advanced vere Leam about access control and permissions Cancel 9
160. ed Press the OK key Close Document Processor Job Accounting restriction exceeded Cannot print Job Accounting The job is canceled Press the OK restriction exceeded key Cannot scan Polling box limit Polling box is full and no further exceeded storage is available The job is Job is canceled canceled Press the OK key Incorrect Login User Enter correct login user name or Name or Password password Job Is canceled Failed to store job Is there insufficient space Printing using the Job Box function 8 67 retention data Job is available on the RAM disk failed because there was insufficient canceled space available on the RAM disk Change the size of RAM disk with the numeric keys RAM disk error Press A RAM disk error has occurred Look OK at the error code given in place of The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 01 Format error Try turning the power off and on again 02 RAM disk mode is Off Turn RAM disk mode On from the operation panel 04 No disk space Purge unnecessary files 05 Specified file is not on disk 06 Insufficient memory to support the RAM disk system Expand the memory Is the user ID entered for The user ID entered for a private job private job correct is not correct Check the user ID that you specified on the printing system driver 10 7 Troubleshooting Check points Corrective Actions ig igs Job Accounting restrict
161. ed Pages Exit A If you select Printed Pages select by Function or by Printed Pages lt V 0 Paper Size in the next screen and then press the OK 0 by Function key by Paper Size Exit 4 Press the lt or gt key to check the count Printed Pages Copy 1234567 11 37 Management 5 After completing checking the count press the OK key The screen returns to the menu for the account 11 38 Appendix e Optional EQUIDMENTL cceeeccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Appendix 2 e Character Entry Method ccccccceseeeeeeees Appendix 5 A mE O12 Cm er ne ree ea AT Appendix 9 e lt SHECHICAUONS sorsra Appendix 18 e GOSS aly errre E A aawigamancices Appendix 22 Appendix 1 Optional Equipment Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available for the machine Soles d a Expansion Memory A Wi WW NN Paper Feeder e Paper Feeder The paper feeder allows you to add three more paper cassettes to the bottom of the machine for continuous feeding of a large volume of paper Paper capacity and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1 Expansion Memory To expand the printer memory for more complex print jobs and faster print speed you can plug in optional memory module dual in line memory module in the memory slot provided on the main controller board You can select additional memory module from 128 256 or 512 MB The maximum
162. ed and the screen returns to the Address Book list screen Refer to the descriptions below for how to enter each item 8 111 Entering Group Name Detail Group Name Sales Section Group Name Salesi Entering Group Member Detail Group Member 30 EIMo rgan Morgan Delete add Member Default Setting System Menu Press the lt or gt key to display Group Name Press Edit the Right Select key An entry screen appears Enter the group name If creating a new group name the address number allocated to the destination is already entered Press the OK key The group name is registered Press the lt or gt key to display Group Member Press Edit the Right Select key This displays the list of destinations registered to the group Press Menu the Right Select key The group editing menu appears Press the A or V key to select Add Member 8 112 Default Setting System Menu 5 Press the OK key This displays the list of destinations Contacts registered in the Address Book amp Fiala amp Maury NOTE If 100 members have already been registered in the amp Morgan group the screen will display Registered numbers exceeded and return to the Group Member 6 Press the A or V key to select the destination you want to add to the group 7 Press the OK key This displays the sending address amp Sally lt 0m registered to the selected destination
163. ed in between Entering Symbols Press Text the Right Select key or on the numeric Symbols s keys to display the Symbols screen Use cursor keys to do H amp Otr ia on symbol you want to enter and then press the POO Ul eda T Text Entry When Select Character Is Selected in Login Operation Settings In the login screen that appears when user management is enabled the character entry method may vary depending on the settings Refer to Login Operation on page 8 66 A If a character palette appears on the screen use cursor Login User Name keys to select the desired character from the displayed re characters and then press the OK key to enter it Babcdefghijklmnoparst uvwxy ZABCDEFPGHIJKLMNO NOTE Numerals can be entered directly by pressing Next numeric keys Appendix 8 Paper This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source Cassette Supported types Supported paper sizes No of sheets Plain Preprinted Bond Recycled A4 JIS B5 A5 Folio Legal Letter 500 80g m Rough Letterhead Color Colour Oficio Il Statement Executive A6 Prepunched High Quality Custom 1 B6 ISO B5 Envelope C5 16K to 8 Custom 105 x 148 to 216 x 356mm 4 1 8 x 5 13 16 to 8 1 2 x 14 inches Optional paper feeder Supported types Supported paper sizes No of sheets Plain Preprinted Bond Recycled A4 JIS B5 A5 Folio Legal Letter 500 80g m
164. ed on user properties on Authentication the local user list stored in the machine Network User authentication based on Authentication Authentication Server Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page Management Use the procedure below to enable user login administration NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter Q 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account Sys Menu Count gt 0 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and ee press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select User Login Set User Job Account 0m User Login Set 1 1 Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit 5 Press the OK key The User Login Set menu appears User Login Set Mm User Login Local User List Group Auth Exit 6 Press the A or V key to select User Login 7 Press the OK key User Login appears User Login Local Authentic Netwk Authentic 8 Press the A or V key to select Local Authentic or Netwk Authentic and then press the OK key Management Select Off
165. ed toner containerto your dealer or service representative The collected toner container will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations 9 6 Maintenance Replacing the Waste Toner Box When replacing the toner container the used waste toner box in the machine should also be replaced with the new one from the new toner kit A new waste toner box is included with the toner kit The machine will not operate without replacing the waste toner box 1 Open the left cover While holding the waste toner box press the lock lever and then gently remove the waste toner box P A ll gt HY NOTE Remove the waste toner box as gently as possible so as not to scatter the toner inside Do not let the opening of the waste toner box face downward 2 Close the cap to the old waste toner box after removing the box from the machine 3 To prevent toner from spilling put the old waste toner box in the plastic bag contained in the toner kit and discard it later according to the local code or regulations for waste disposal 4 Open the cap of the new waste toner box 9 7 Maintenance 5 Insert the new waste toner box as shown at the left When the box is set correctly it will snap into place WINN wi i lk lk Q N il PT 4 A A 2 6 Make sure that the waste toner box is correctly inserted and close the left cover 7 After replacing the toner containers and the waste to
166. eeeees 2 29 e Preparation for sending a document to a PC 2 31 LOAGING PAD CN nasrni e E E 2 41 lt LOGGING ONIGINAlS sraoin e 2 54 2 1 Preparation before Use Check bundled items Check that the following items have been bundled e Quick Installation Guide e Safety Guide e Safety Guide for this machine only e DVD ROM Product Library e DVD ROM TWAIN compatible application Documents Contained in the Included DVD ROM The following documents are contained in the included DVD ROM Product Library Refer to them as necessary Documents Operation Guide This Guide FAX Operation Guide Embedded Web Server Operation Guide Printing System Driver User Guide Network FAX Driver Operation Guide Network Print Monitor User Guide Network Tool for Direct Printing Operation Guide PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference 2 2 Preparation before Use Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network and prepare the necessary cables Connection Example Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable 100BASE TX or 10BASE T Embedded Web Server Network Send E mail Administrator s Network settings Scanner Sends the image data of scanned originals to _ the desired reci
167. efresh 8 103 Start the drum refresh Are you sure Yes Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears 7 Press Yes the Left Select key Drum refresh is executed 8 104 Default Setting System Menu Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One touch keys The saved destinations can be changed The destinations are available for Send as E mail Send to Folder and Fax Transmission NOTE Embedded Web Server can be used to efficiently save and edit multiple destinations Adding an Individual Destination A maximum of 100 individual addresses can be registered Each address can include the information such as destination name E mail address FTP server folder path computer folder path and FAX No NOTE e If user login administration is enabled you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges e Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select Edit Destination FAX Document Box 4 Edit Destination Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact Gi 2 Press the OK key The Edit Destination menu appears Edit Destination gt addressbook Pint List Press the A or V key to select Address Book 4 Press the OK ke
168. elete the destination Press Exit the Right Select key to return to the basic screen Press the Start key Transmission starts NOTE If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission page 8 88 is set to On the Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start key is pressed For more information refer to Confirm Destination Screen on page 3 25 3 24 Basic Operation Confirm Destination Screen If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission page 8 88 is set to On Check through the all destination and press Next appears when the Start key is pressed Use the procedure below to operate the Confirm Destination screen 1 Press the A or V key to check all destinations Destination List lt m MMorgan tttttEH Press the OK key to edit or delete the selected Glo667640000 destination 210667741234 To add a destination press Cancel the Left Select key Cancel Next to return to the previous screen MMorgan ttt et tt OM Detail Delete 2 After the checking is finished press Next the Right Set original Select key Set original and press Start key is displayed and press Start key on the screen Cancel If there are destinations that are hidden and not yet Check Une destination checked the screen displays Check the destination list list through the end through the end and returns to the Destination List screen Check all destinations
169. ements Y 1 97 to 8 50 in 0 01 increments Metric models F 50 to 356 mm in 1 mm increments 50 to 216 mm in 1 mm increments Use the procedure below to set a custom original size Sys Menu Count 0m System User Job Account 05 Common Settings Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound EXit Orig Paper Set gt M Custom Orig Size Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit Size Entry Y 1 97 8 50 EERTE Size Entry X 1 97 14 02 me 4 02 i 8 8 In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears Press the A or V key to select Custom Orig Size Press the OK key Size Entry Y appears Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length Y Press the OK key Size Entry X appears Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width X Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig Paper Set menu Default Setting System Menu Default Original Size Setup In the screen for setting the paper size for the paper feed cassette or multi purpose tray select the paper size to be used as the default value Use the procedure below to select the paper size to be used as the default value 7 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys M
170. ements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission TWAIN Technology Without Any Interested Name A technical specification for connecting scanners digital cameras and other image equipment to the computers The TWAIN compatible devices enable to process image data on any relevant application software TWAIN is adopted on a large number of graphic software e g Adobe Photoshop and OCR software USB Universal Serial Bus 2 0 A USB interface standard for Hi Speed USB 2 0 The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps This machine is equipped with USB 2 0 for high speed data transfer Appendix 24 WIA Windows Imaging Acquisition A function to import images supported after Windows Me XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices This function replaces what TWAIN used to do the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of operation so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application Appendix 25 Appendix 26 Index Numerics 1 sided 2 sided Selection 5 7 A Accessibility Appendix 22 Adjusting Density 5 13 Auto 3 8 Manual 3 8 Adjustment Maintenance 8 98 Copy Density Adjustment 8 98 Correcting Fine Black Lines 8 100 Developer Refresh 8 101 8 102 send Box Density 8 99 AppleTalk Appendix 22 Auto Low Power Mode 2 8 Auto Paper Selection Appendix 22 Auto Sleep 2 8 Appendix 22 B Bonjour Appendix 22 Bundled Items
171. ences Default printer Last Printer Used B Default paper size A4 M a Click the lock to prevent further changes Uninstalling Software Windows PC The software can be uninstalled removed using the DVD ROM Product Library supplied with the printer IMPORTANT On Macintosh computers because the printer settings are specified using a PPD PostScript Printer Description file the software cannot be uninstalled using the DVD ROM Product Library 1 Exit all active software applications 2 Insert the enclosed DVD ROM Product Library into the DVD ROM drive In Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista the user account control window may appear Click Allow 3 Following the procedure used to install the printing system driver click Remove Software The Brand Name Uninstaller wizard appears 4 Select the software package to remove 2 23 Preparation before Use 5 Click Uninstall NOTE When Network Print Monitor is installed separate uninstallers are launched for this application Proceed with the uninstallation steps for this application as directed by the on screen instructions The uninstaller starts 6 When Uninstall complete screen appears click Finish 7 If Restart Your System screen appears select whether you restart your computer or not and click Finish NOTE The software can be uninstalled from the Start menu Start the uninstaller by clicking start gt All Programs gt
172. enu Select whether or not to use the DHCP server The default setting is On Use the procedure below to specify the DHCP setting gt 0 Sys Menu Count Report Counter Login User Name Login Password Login System Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Network Setting V0 TCP IP Settings NetWare AppleTalk Exit TCP IP Settings mMm IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The System menu appears Press the A or V key to select Network Setting Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select TCP IP Settings Press the OK key The TCP IP Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select TCP IP 8 126 TCP IP Settings TCP IP IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting EXit IPv4 Setting Sa OK Bonjour IP Address EXit Default Setting System Menu 8 Press the OK key TCP IP appears 9 Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP IP Settings menu 10 Press the A or V key to select IPv4 Setting 11 Press the OK key The IPv4 Setting menu appears 12 Press the A or V key to select D
173. enu Count lt gt select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu Common Settings lt gt appears 01 Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set 8 4 Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears Orig Paper Set gt 00 0i Custom Orig Size Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Def Orig Size 6 Press the OK key Def Orig Size appears Def Orig Size Mm ol Letter Legal Statement 4 7 Press the A or V key to select the paper size to be used as the default value 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig Paper Set menu 8 9 Default Setting System Menu Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print Set up a frequently used custom paper size The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select paper The table below lists the sizes that can be registered Inch models Cassette Paper Feeder Option MP Tray Metric models Cassette Paper Feeder Option MP Tray X 4 13 to 8 50 in 0 01 increments 5 83 to 14 02 in 0 01 increments 5 83 to 8 50 in 0 01 increments 8 27 to 14 02 in 0 01 increments 2 75 to 8 50 in 0 01 increments 5 83 to 14 02 in 0 01 increments 148 to 216 in 1 mm increments 148
174. enu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select JobFinish Notice Press the OK key JobFinish Notice appears 6 Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key 7 Press the A or V key to select Address Book or Address Entry and then press the OK key 8 Ifyou select Address Book select Address Book on the next screen and press the OK key and then select the notice destination Press Menu the Right Select key select Detail on the next screen and press the OK key to view the details of the selected notice destination If you select Address Entry enter the address of the notice destination NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 9 Press the OK key 5 21 Sending Functions Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 10 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending When the sending is completed the finish notice is sent to the specified E mail address NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 22 Sending Functions FTP Encrypted TX This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them If you select On in this option you can then select the encryption method in the basic send screen Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on
175. er 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer Fmulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR EXit 3 Press the A or V key to select Paper Feed Mode 8 84 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press the OK key Paper Feed Mode appears Paper Feed Mode lt M Fixed 5 Press the A or V key to select Auto or Fixed 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu 8 85 Default Setting System Menu Sending Settings The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options e Select Key Set 8 86 e Document Box Settings 8 88 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key you can quickly set the function when using sending functions You can register one of the following functions to each key e None e Color Selection e Original Size e Original Image e Scan Resolution e Sending Size e Zoom e Orig Orientation e Continuous Scan e File Format e File Name Entry e Subject Body e JobFinish Notice e FAX Resolution e FAX Direct TX e FAX Delayed TX e FAX RX Polling e Density e Duplex e FTP Encrypted TX e File Separation 8 86 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press
176. ered Hiti characters Host Name Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64 FTP characters Path to the receiving folder Up to 128 For example User ScanData characters Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory Login User FTP server log in user name Up to 64 Name characters Login FTP server log in password Up to 64 Password characters To specify a port number different from the default 21 enter using the format host name port number e g nee aa 140 12 Press Yes the Left Select key This makes a D st Contirm ag OK connection with the entered destination MMorgan G tttttEH 4 0667640000 40667741234 EXit 3 23 Dest IBEI5 S amp PT10 Confirm lt gt OK 13 14 15 Basic Operation If the connection is successful Connected is displayed on the screen Press OK the Right Select key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen If the connection failed Cannot connect is displayed Press OK the Right Select key The screen shown in step 3 reappears Check and re enter the destination If there are additional destinations press the Add Destination key Repeat steps 2 to 12 to enter additional destinations Up to 100 destinations can be specified Press the Confirm Destination key to confirm the registered destinations Press the A or V key to select a destination and press the OK key Then you can edit or d
177. es With FAX Standard 10 4 W U S A Canada 10 6 W European countries With options 12 5 W U S A Canada 12 6 W European countries Power Consumption 0 1 W Power off Paper feeder up to 3 units Appendix 19 Printer a I Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed First Print Time 9 5 seconds or less A4 feed from Cassette Fine 1200 Fast 1200 600 dpi 300 dpi Operating System Windows XP Windows XP Professional Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition Windows Vista x86 Edition Windows Vista x64 Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 x64 Edition Windows 7 Apple Macintosh OS 10 x Interface Standard USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed USB Host 1 Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Page Description Language PRESCRIBE Scanner a rr ee Operating System Windows XP Windows Vista Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 System requirements IBM PC AT compatible CPU Celeron 600Mhz or higher RAM 128MB or more HDD free space 20MB or more Interface Ethernet Scanning Speed 1 sided B W 35 Images min Color 13 Images min A4 landscape 600 dpi Image quality Text Photo original Interface Ethernet 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX USB2 0 hn Speed USB Network Protocol TCP IP Transmission PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB System FTP Scan to FTP FTP over SSL E mail transmission SNMP Scan to E mail TWAIN scan WIA scan 4 Available Operat
178. es unless sooner terminated This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty 80 days after notice from Monotype Imaging When this License expires or is terminated you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested You agree that you will not modify alter disassemble decrypt reverse engineer or decompile the Software Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging published specifications and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions The parties agree that all other warranties expressed or implied including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability are excluded Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts upon their return to Monotype Imaging In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits lost data or any other incidental or consequential damages or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces Massachusetts U S A law governs this Agreement You shall not sublicense sell
179. es XXV XVIII Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of the copyright owner is prohibited Regarding Trade Names PRESCRIBE is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows NT and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and or other countries Windows Me Windows XP and Windows Vista are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation PCL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Adobe Acrobat Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc IBM and IBM PC AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U S A and or other countries AppleTalk Bonjour Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries TypeBankG B TypeBankM M and Typebank OCR are trademarks of TypeBank All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc Helvetica Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype Hell AG ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Bookman ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Type face Corporation UFST
180. es of Destinations Multi Sending You can specify destinations that combine e mail addresses folders SMB or FTP and fax numbers This is referred to as Multi Sending This is useful for sending to different types of destination e mail addresses folders etc in a single operation No of broadcast items E mail Up to 100 Folders SMP FTP Total of 1 SMB and FTP FAX Up to 100 Also depending on the settings you can send and print at the same time Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types Continue to enter E mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list Press the Start key to launch transmission to all destinations at one time 3 28 Basic Operation Canceling Jobs Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed Canceling Jobs You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key 1 During a printing or sending job press the Stop key The Job Cancel List lt gt Job Cancel List menu appears Print Job List Send Job List NOTE Pressing the Stop key pauses a printing job but Store Jop LISE does not pause a sending job Exit 2 Press the A or V key to select the type of job you want Print Job List z to stop and then press the OK key An output queue of 0008 Copy the selected job type is displayed 0009 Dmaury s data 0010 Microsoftwor Resume Menu 3 Press the A or V key to select the job yo
181. ess the OK key Option I F appears Option I F 0 Unblock Block 7 Press the A or V key to select Unblock or Block 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the System menu 8 149 Default Setting System Menu Security Level Security Level setting The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work There is no need for customers to use this menu Optional Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine Opt Functions Although nothing is currently displayed when the optional functions that will be released in the future is installed the licenses can be set using this menu 8 150 9 Maintenance This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement Be CS aN Gl ea eeesncstics antec ace aseo akrusccuee nese naeccacea aces e Toner Container Replacement ccccseceeeeeeeeeeees e Replacing the Waste Toner BOX cccccseeeeeeeeeeees e Replacing the maintenance kit MK 370 0 9 1 Maintenance Cleaning Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality CAUTION For safety always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine Glass Platen Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent IMPORTANT Do not use thinner or other organic solvents Document Proces
182. ess the OK key This displays the density selection screen for the mode selected in step 5 The screen shown is the one when Manual is selected 7 Press the A or V key to select the density from 3 Lighter to 3 Darker 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy Denst Adj menu Send Box Density Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes A 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Adjust Maint Document Box i Edit Destination Adjust Maint 2 Press the OK key The Adjust Maint menu appears Adjust Maint gt 0m 0i Copy Denst Adj Send Box Density Correct Bk Line Exit Press the A or V key to select Send Box Density 4 Press the OK key Send Box Density appears Send Box Density gt Manual 5 Press the A or V key to select Auto or Manual 6 Press the OK key This displays the density selection screen for the mode selected in step 5 The screen shown is the one when Manual is selected 7 Press the A or V key to select the density from 3 Lighter to 3 Darker 8 99 Default Setting System Menu 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Send Box Density menu Correct Bk Line Correct fine black lines black streaks caused by contamination which may app
183. essing Exit the Right Select key while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original screen The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen me ew o 2 Type Icons that indicate the job type ESending Job FAX f l ESending Job PC SMB IB m Sending Job PC FTP Iz MSending Job E mail 4 mSending Job TWAIN2 Ey m Sending Job WSD Scan When broadcast sending is done Broadcast is displayed next to the icon 3 Destination Destination Either destination name FAX number E mail address or server name 4 Status Status of job Es Sending no icon sending Waiting Il Pausing the job X Stop sending Store Job Status screen 1 Status Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status Pause 2 3 Store Job Status gt 0m Status Processing men Status Job Cancel Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu appears Press the A or V key to select Store Job Status Press the OK key Store Job Status appears Press the A or V key to check the store queue Press the OK key to check detailed information of the selected job NOTE You can also check the job information by pressing Menu the Right Select key and selecting Detail in the u that appears Press the lt or gt key to switch the display to other information items The items displayed are as follows Status status of job Accepted Time Job Name Job Type User Na
184. eys and press the OK key NOTE If you entered a wrong character press the Clear key and enter the account ID again If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID a warning beep will sound and login will fail Enter the correct account ID By pressing Counter the Left Select key you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears If user login administration is enabled the screen to enter the login user name and password appears Enter a login user name and password to log in Refer to Login Logout on page 11 5 If the user has already registered the account information the account ID entry would be skipped Refer to Adding a User on page 11 6 2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps When the operations are complete press the Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen 11 17 Management Managing Accounts This section explains how to add a new account The following entries are required ee Enter the account name up to 32 characters Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits between 0 and 99999999 Restriction This Prohibits printing scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11 23 Use the procedure below to register a new account NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on enter
185. f other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix Be careful when choosing paper Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled Supported Paper Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output Basic Paper Specifications The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine Refer to the subsequent sections for further details Pulp content 80 or more NOTE Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications shown below such as moisture or pulp content For this reason we recommend purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications Appendix 11 Choosing the Appropriate Paper This section describes guidelines for choosing paper Condition Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled dirty or torn Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint or that is especially delicate Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may also cause jams and
186. for copying shown here while operating the machine Selects the menu displayed at the lower right in the Message Display System Menu Counter Status Co py Job Cancel S Ley lee E mail Document Send flger Box O EE Print Send Receive DEN E Displays the FAX screen where Blinks while data you can send a FAX is transmitted Displays the Send screen where you can send an e mail Blinks during printing folder SMB FTP or FAX operation Selects the menu displayed at the lower left in the Message Display Displays the Document Box screen where you can operate the document box and USB memory Used to register call and delete destinations to the one touch key numbers 1 to 22 Shifts to switch the one touch key numbers 1 to 11 and 12 to 22 Lamp is lit while shifted 12 to 22 Only on products with the fax function installed Part Names Used to select a menu item move the cursor when Clears entered numbers and characters entering characters change a value etc Resets settings and displays the basic screen Selects the chosen item or finalizes the entered value Displays the function menu for copy Puts the machine to sleep or print transmission and document box wakes it up Lit when the machine s main power is on Clear Reset Program Power Functio Menu D 2 G O 6 jane Stop Logout a 5 E PQRS WXYZ Ose C Back
187. g M Apply Limit Copy Print Count Counter Limit EXit Apply Limit gt m Immediately 02 Subsequently Alert Only Management 6 Press the A or V key to select Default Setting 7 Press the OK key The Default Setting menu appears 8 Press the A or V key to select Apply Limit 9 Press the OK key Apply Limit appears 10 Press the A or V key to select Immediately Subsequently or Alert Only 11 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Default Setting menu 11 27 Management Default Counter Limit When you add a new account you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used You can set any number from 1 to 9 999 999 in 1 sheet increments The items that can be set differ depending on whether Split or Total is selected for Managing the Copier Printer Counts on page 11 22 Available Settings Split selected for Copier Printer Count Copy Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for copying Print Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for printing Scan Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets Other used for scanning excludes copying FAX TX Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets Restriction used for sending faxes For FAX models only Total selected for Copier Printer Count Print Restriction Sets the default restr
188. gs system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings 01 Language Default Screen Sound EXit 3 Press the A or V key to select Date Setting and press 8 the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and Pe press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 4 The Date Settings menu appears Date Setting gt 0m Date Format Time Zone Summer Time EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Summer Time 6 Press the OK key Summer Time appears Summer Time 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu 8 31 Default Setting System Menu Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during printing the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user In the Auto Error Clear mode automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses The following errors are automatically cleared Cannot duplex print on this paper Send error Cannot connect to Authentication Server Incorrect account ID Job is canceled Job Accounting restriction exceeded Cannot print Job Accounting restriction exceeded Cannot scan Job not stored Press OK Job Accounting restriction exceeded Job is canceled Polling box li
189. gs selected in Function Menu 5 2 Sending Functions Sending Size Select the sending size the size of image to be sent The table below lists the sizes Sending Same as OrigSize Legal Letter Statement Executive Sizes Offcio Il A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 Folio 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 and Youkei 2 Relationship between Original Size Sending Size and Zoom Original Size page 5 2 Sending Size and Zoom page 5 5 are related to each other Refer to the following table Original Size and the size you wish to send as are Original Size Specify as Specify as necessary necessary sending Size Select Same as Select the OrigSize required size Zoom Select 100 Select Auto or Auto NOTE When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size and select the Zoom 100 you can send the image as the actual size No Zoom Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu Said OK Color Selection UO Original Size Oo Original Image O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Sending Size 5 Press the OK key Sending Size appears Sending Size fol Same as OrigSize Letter Legal 6 Press the A or V key to select the desired
190. he ID entry screen appears Enter the ID and press the OK key A 12 The number of copies screen appears Set the number a or of copies and press the OK key Md oo i es 13 The file print confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key Accepted appears and printing begins Quick Copy mode This mode is used to print an additional copy of a document that has already been printed If a document is printed with Proof and hold selected in the printing system driver the document will be simultaneously stored on the RAM disk The required number of copies can be printed whenever needed from the operation panel If more documents than the 6 10 Document Box set maximum are stored the oldest job will be overwritten each time a new job is stored When the machine power is turned off jobs stored in this mode are erased For the number of documents that can be stored in Quick Copy mode see Quick Copy Jobs on page 8 88 1 Press the Document Box key The Document Box menu Document Box a OK appears Sub Address Box Polling Box 2 Press the A or V key to select Job Box 3 Press the OK key The Job Box menu appears Private Gi Quick Copy 4 Press the A or V key to select Quick Copy 5 Press the OK key The user selection menu appears Quick Copy amp Fiala 6 Press the A or V key to select the user 7 Press the OK key The print file selection menu appears amp Fiala A Data02 A Datad3 Men
191. he Network Setting menu appears Network Setting gt ol TCP IP Settings NetWare AppleTalk Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select TCP IP Settings 6 Press the OK key The TCP IP Settings menu appears TCP IP Settings IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Protocol Detail 7 Press the A or V key to select Protocol Detail 8 137 Default Setting System Menu 8 Press the OK key The Protocol Detail menu appears Protocol Detail gt W W NetBEUI SNMPv3 FTP Server 9 Press the A or V key to select the item for which you want to make settings F 10 Press the OK key This displays the setting screen for PEP C pent lt 0 the item selected in step 9 The screen shown is the one when FTP Client is selected 11 Press the A or V key to select On or Off If you select On for each of FT P Client and IPP and Port Number press the OK key a port number entry screen appears CL Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to set the port number 12 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Protocol Detail menu 8 138 Default Setting System Menu Network Security The network security functions can be set up to protect printer operation and the print data The following network security settings are available e IPSec Setting 8 139 e SSL Setting 8 140 e SNMPv3 Setting 8 145 IPSec Setting Make this setting when you use IPSec The
192. he OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the User Job Account menu Unknown login user name Job This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID i e unsent IDs If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown The table below shows the available settings ee eee The job is rejected not printed The job is permitted to be printed Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter O 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account Sys Menu Count gt 00 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit 11 13 Login User Name Login Password Login User Job Account gt M User Login Set Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Unknown ID Job lt M ol Reject Permit Management A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key 3 The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Unknown ID Job 5 Press the OK key Unknown ID Job appears 6 Press the A or V key to select Reject or Permit 7 Press the OK key Co
193. he OK key MP Tray Type appears Press the A or V key to select the desired paper type and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the MP Tray Set menu 2 53 Loading Originals Preparation before Use Follow the steps below to load originals for copying sending or storing Placing Originals on the Platen You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals 1 Open the document processor NOTE Before opening the document processor be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original eject table Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is opened Keep the document processor open if the original is 40 mm or thicker 2 Place the original Put the scanning side facedown and align it flush against the original size indicator plate with the back left corner as the reference point 3 Close the document processor IMPORTANT Do not push the original cover forcefully when you close it Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass Do not close the document processor when the original is 40 mm or thicker NOTE Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open faced originals CAUTION Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury 2 54 Preparation before Use Loading Originals in the Document Pro
194. he multi purpose tray and select MP Tray 8 Select paper orientation either Portrait or Landscape to match the orientation of the document Selecting Rotated will print the document rotated 180 9 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box 10 Click OK button to start printing Printing Using Half Speed Mode When printing on a paper with a smooth surface or thick paper adjust the printing speed using the printing system driver For details refer to Printing System Driver User Guide Basic Operation Sending This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E mail message or to a PC linked to the network In order to do this it is necessary to register the sender and destination recipient address on the network A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required It is recommended that a Local Area Network LAN be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues At the same time as you send a scanned image you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps Program the settings including the E mail setting on the machine Use Embedded Web Server the internal HTML web page to register the IP address the host name of the SMTP server and the recipient Register the destination in the Address Book or One touch keys When the PC Folder SMB F TP is selected it is necessary to shar
195. his displays the flexible key selection screen for the function selected in step 5 The screen shown is the one when Print is selected Right 7 Press the A or V key to select Left or Right 8 Press the OK key This displays the function selection Ler screen for the flexible key selected in step 7 The screen Paper Selection shown is the one when Left is selected File Name Entry 9 Press the A or V key to select the function you want to register to the flexible key 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Document Box menu 8 91 Default Setting System Menu IMPORTANT If you try to set the function that is registered This function is to the other flexible key you cannot set it and This function is already registered already registered is displayed 8 92 Default Setting System Menu Printing Reports Sending Notice Print reports to check the machine settings and status Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges Printing Reports Printable reports are as follows Menu map Outputs a menu map of this machine Menu Map MFP Firmware Version Status Page Check the information including current settings available memory space and optional equipment installed Status Page MFP Firmware Version 8 93 Defaul
196. iction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing Scan Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets Other used for scanning excludes copying FAX TX Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets Restriction used for sending faxes For FAX models only Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter Q 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account Sys Menu Count gt 0 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit 11 28 Login User Name Login Password Login User Job Account gt M User Login Set Job Account set Unknown ID Job EXit Job Account Set lt Each Job Account AGcount List Default Setting Default Setting M 0 Apply Limit Copy Print Count Counter Limit Exit Counter Limit gt m 0l Copy Restriction Print Restrict ScanRest Other Management A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key NOTE The User Job Account menu appears Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 3 The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set 5 Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears 6 Press the A o
197. il and press the OK key to see information of the registered accounts 12 Account List is displayed and the new account is added to the account list Managing Accounts This changes the registered account information or deletes the account 11 19 Management Use the procedure below to manage accounts NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter Q 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account Sys Menu Count gt 0 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and ee press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set User Job Account gt User Login Set Job Account set Unknown ID Job Exit 5 Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears Job Account Set lt m Each Job Account Account List Default Setting Exit 6 Press the A or V key to select Account List 7 Press the OK key Account List appears Account List lt gt 0 SUI R amp D DEP eeGUI Design eeRD Center The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited 11 20 Management Changing account
198. iles in the folder Documents in the top 3 folder levels including the root directory can be viewed 6 2 Document Box 6 Press Select the Right Select key The selected file USB Memory name is indicated by a checkmark next to it Store File Gh Folder 1 Menu Select When you want to print additional files repeat steps 5 to 6 to select them 7 Press the OK key A menu appears USB Memory Delete 8 Press the A or V key to select Print 9 Press the OK key The basic screen appears Change Ready to print the number of copies 1 sided 2 sided printing etc as Copies 1 necessary For changing print settings refer to aA g P asp Copying on page 3 7 and Copying Functions on page 4 1 Sided i Duplex Paper 10 Press the Start key Printing of the selected file begins IMPORTANT When removing the USB memory ensure that you use the correct removal procedure as described in Removing USB Memory on page 6 8 TIFF Print Sets the print mode for TIFF files The default setting is Paper Size 1 Follow steps 1 to 9 of Printing on page 6 2 2 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu ai OK 0 Collate Paper Selection O Duplex o EXit 3 Press the A or V key to select TIFF Print 6 3 TLE Print ol Paper Size Image Resolution Print Resolution XPS FitTo Page Document Box Press the OK key TIFF Print appears Press the A or V key to sele
199. imum density is selected according to the density of the original NOTE You may choose Auto mode as the default setting refer to Density on page 8 45 The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below 1 Function Menu aid OK Paper Selection O Collate Duplex 2 3 4 Manual Sa OK EJLighter 1 Ei Normal O EJ Darker 1 6 3 8 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Density Press the OK key Density appears Press the A or V key to select Auto or Manual Press the OK key When Manual is selected Manual appears Press the A or V key to select your desired density and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen Press the Start key Copying begins Basic Operation Selecting Image Quality Select image quality suited to the type of original The table below shows the quality options Text Photo For originals with both text and photographs For photos taken with a camera For originals primarily consisting of text The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below 1 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu a OK 0l Paper Selection O Collate Duplex 2 Press the A or V key to select Original Image 3 Press the OK key Original Image appears Original Image aa OK 0o1 Text Photo Photo Text 4 Press the
200. in and EERE Eee press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 8 141 Default Setting System Menu 2 The System menu appears System Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level EXit 3 Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 4 Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Network Setting gt Secure Protocol Host Name LAN Interface EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Secure Protocol 6 Press the OK key Secure Protocol appears Secure Protocol m SSL IPP Security HTTP Security EXit 7 Press the A or V key to select IPP Security 8 Press the OK key IPP Security appears IPP Security gt 0m TPP IPP over SSL 024 ITPPoverSSL only 9 Press the A or V key to select IPP IPP over SSL or IPPoverSSL only 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu HTTP Security Specify the protocol to be used for HTTP The default setting is HTTPS only Use the procedure below to make the setting A 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select System and press the OK key Report Counter 8 142 Default Setting System Menu A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name password with administrator privileges to log in and Tt press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The
201. in User Name Wj not logged in a login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password to log in Login Password NOTE The following administrator is registered in the Login machine at the factory Login User Name 4000 Login Password 4000 Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 3 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count V 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 4 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Language 2 9 Language ol English Deutsch Francais Preparation before Use 6 Press the OK key Language appears 7 Press the A or V key to select the desired language and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu 2 10 Setting Date and Time Preparation before Use Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation When you send an E mail using the transmission function the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E mail message Set the date time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used NOTE Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time System Menu Counter Q Sys Menu Count gt 0
202. information 1 Press the A or V key to select the account whose information you want to change and then press the OK key Account List SUI R amp D DEP 22GUI Design SeRD Center 2 Press the lt or gt key to select the item you want to Detar change press Edit the Right Select key change Account Name account information and restriction of use and then GUI Design press the OK key NOTE Activate or deactivate restriction Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11 23 Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary 4 After completing changing the account information OVSYWI LEG press the OK key again A confirmation screen appears Are you sure eGUI DESIGN Yes 5 Press Yes the Left Select key The account information is changed Registered is displayed and the screen returns to Account List Deleting an account 7 1 Press the A or V key to select the account you want to Accounts List v delete and then press Menu the Right Select key SUI R amp D DEP amp eGCGUI Design SeRD Center 2 Press the A or V key to select Delete Menu Detail Edit add Account 11 21 Management 3 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Delete Are you sure eUI R amp D DEPT Yes 4 Press Yes the Left Select key The account is deleted Completed is displayed and the screen returns to Account List Managing the Copier Printer Counts
203. ing System Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 2 Available Operating System Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Appendix 20 Document Processor a ee Original Feed Automatic feed Method Supported Original Sheet originals Types Paper Size Maximum Legal A4 Minimum Statement A5 Paper Weight Simplex 50 to 120 g m Duplex 50 to 110 g m Loading Capacity 50 sheets 50 to 80 g m maximum Environmental Specifications r Time to Low Power mode default 2 minutes setting NOTE Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types EN ISO 7779 Der h chste Schalldruckpegel betr gt 70 dB A oder weniger gem EN ISO 7779 EK1 ITB 2000 Das Ger t ist nicht f r die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen Um st rende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden Appendix 21 Glossary AppleTalk AppleTalk which comes with Apple Computer s Mac OS is a network protocol AppleTalk enables file printer sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network Auto Form Feed Timeout During data transmission the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data This is the auto form feed timeout When the preset timeout passes the machine autom
204. ing characters 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit system Menu operation panel Counter Q Sys Menu Count lt 0 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and L press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set User Job Account gt User Login Set Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit 11 18 Management 5 Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears Job Account Set lt m Each Job Account Account List Default Setting Exit 6 Press the A or V key to select Account List 7 Press the OK key Account List appears Account List lt 0 o Ul R amp D DEP eeGUI Design SeRD Center R 8 Press Menu the Right Select key press the A or V Menu lt 0m key to select Add Account and then press the OK key Detail Edit Delete add Account 9 Enter the account name and press the OK key Account Name 10 Enter the account code and press the OK key Account ID NOTE Any account ID that has already registered cannot be used Enter any other account ID 11 Press the A or V key to select Exit and then press the OK key Detail Select Deta
205. ion this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments check the following The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server A full time connection via a LAN is recommended e SMTP Settings Use Embedded Web Server to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server e If limits have been set on the size of E mail messages it may not be possible to send very large E mails e Sender address The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below 1 Click Advanced gt SMTP gt General canner FAx y i FAX Jobs Document Box AppleTalk NetBEUI E SMTP j E mail Recipient 2 E mail Recipient 3 SMTP Protocol SMTP Port Number SMTP Server Name SMTP Server Timeout Authentication Protocol m l a a 2 29 General E mail Recipient 1 E mail Recipient 2 E mail Recipient 3 on O of 25 mailserver com 30 seconds on O POP before Preparation before Use 2 Enter the correct settings in each field The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below tem eseription O SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol To use E mail this protocol must be enabled SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25 SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name The maximum leng
206. ion exceeded Job is canceled Is the acceptable printing count restricted by Job Accounting exceeded Machine failure Call service Is Error code C4200 displayed Memory is full Print job cannot be processed completely Memory is full Job is The job is canceled Press the OK canceled Key This job is canceled Press the OK key USB memory error Job is canceled The printing count exceeded the acceptable count restricted by Job Accounting Cannot print any more This job is canceled Press the OK key Internal error has occurred Make a note of the error code displayed on the Message Display Turn off the machine unplug the power cord and contact your Service Representative Internal condensation has occurred as a result of a sudden change in temperature Turn off the machine and let stand for 30 to 90 minutes and then back on again If this message still remains turn off the machine unplug the power cord and contact your Service Representative Unable to continue the job as the memory is used up Press the OK key to print the scanned pages The print job cannot be processed completely Press the Stop key to cancel the job Removable memory is This job is canceled Press the OK full Job is canceled key Close the paper feeder properly Cannot feed paper set 2 42 cassette 1 Is any of the paper feeders or the printer cassette upper than the selected one properly closed when one
207. is considerably curled in one direction for example if the paper is already printed on one side try to roll the paper in the opposite direction to counteract the curl Printed sheets will then come out flat Correct Incorrect When loading envelope place with the envelope flap closed and keep the printing side face up Insert envelope against the guide with the flap on the front or left side until they stop 5 Set the MP tray paper size on the printer s operation panel Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media on page 2 49 2 46 Preparation before Use Loading Envelopes 5 envelope may be loaded in the multi purpose tray Gi Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows ee f To print on envelopes press the envelope switches in the rear cover to change to envelope mode 1 Open the rear cover 2 Press the two envelope switches green to change the paper feed mode to envelope mode CAUTION The fuser unit inside the printer is hot A Do not touch it with your hands as it may result in burn injury 2 47 Preparation before Use 3 Close the rear cover 4 Follow the steps of Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 45 NOTE When printing on plain paper press the two envelope switches green again to change the paper feed mode to plain paper mode When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray Load envelope with the print side facing up
208. istered Recalling from One touch Keys 12 to 22 Press the Shift Lock key to turn on the lamp next to the keys and then press the one touch key where the destination is registered 2 The destination registered to the one touch key is Address Entry aid OK recalled and automatically entered on the screen SyG HHHHHHHHHHH co jo ne IMPORTANT Any destination already entered is overwritten Text Program Keys Settings of various functions frequently used for copying and sending can be collectively registered as a program Then you can change the current settings of various functions to the registered settings by just pressing one of the Program 1 to 4 keys NOTE The following functions are already registerd in Program 1 key This function allows you to copy the front and back sides of ID card or other document that is smaller than Stetement or A5 size onto a single page Although the functions are deleted by overwriting Program 1 key you can register the same settings using the Function Menu key Combine 2 in 1 Continuous Scan On Original Size Statement Inch models A5 Metric models Paper Selection Cassette 1 Zoom Options Auto Zoom 3 3 Program Power I ID Card Copy Logout O Registering Settings Basic Operation ID Card Copy is printed on the Program 1 key When the functions are deleted by overwriting Program 1 key seal the label supplied with the machine and write the function name in
209. it After making settings press and hold the one of the Program Registered 1 to 4 keys where you want to register the settings for 3 seconds The current settings are registered to the selected Program 1 program key Changing and Deleting Settings Overwrite Delete Overwrite Are you sure Program 1 Yes Delete Are you sure Program 1 Yes Recalling Settings Press and hold the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys where the settings you want to change delete are registered for 3 seconds Menu appears To replace the registered settings with the current settings press the A or V key to select Overwrite and then press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key to change the settings To delete the registered settings press the A or V key to select Delete and then press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key to delete the registered settings Press the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys where the settings you want to recall are registered The current settings of various functions are replaced with the registered settings 3 4 Basic Operation ID Card Copy The procedure for using ID Card copying is explained below 1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key indicator is off NOTE If the Message Display is turned off press the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up 2 Place the original on the platen P
210. ividual s destination is selected 9 Edit items as necessary For how to edit each item refer to Adding an Individual Destination on page 8 105 and Adding a Group on page 8 110 10 After completing editing press the OK key A OVerwrite confirmation screen appears Are you sure MSally Yes 11 Press Yes the Left Select key Registered is displayed and the screen returns to the Address Book list screen 8 115 Adding a Destination on One touch Key Default Setting System Menu This machine has 11 one touch keys and you can register 2 destinations to each of them The one touch keys are arranged as shown below NOTE Refer to One Touch Key on page 3 3 for how to use them Registering new destination Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One touch key 1 Select Key No gt mMm 2 3 Addressbook lt 0 eeDesign amp Fiala amp Maury 4 In the Send or FAX screen press the one touch key to which you want to register the destination and hold it 2 seconds or longer Select Key Set appears The screen shown is the one when No 1 No 12 is pressed and held Press the A or V key to select the key number to which you want to register the destination Press the OK key The Address Book list screen appears Press the A or V key to select the destination you want to register NOTE If you want to search from the Address Book refer to Search in Addre
211. k the individuals to be included in the group must be added first Up to 100 destinations can be added as the addresses Among them one destination can be assigned for a FTP or SMB address The available addresses will be 99 in total for email and or fax addresses For example you can add 75 email addresses 24 fax addresses and a FTP address Use the procedure below to register a group z 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Edit Destination FAX Document Box i Edit Destination 8 110 Edit Destination gt M addressbook Prine List Addressbook gt m eeDesign amp Fiala amp Maury Menu Detail Edit Delete add Address Add Address Contact Detail Group Name Sales Section Default Setting System Menu 2 Press the OK key The Edit Destination menu appears 3 Press the A or V key to select Address Book 4 Press the OK key The Address Book list screen appears 5 Press Men the Right Select key Menu appears 6 Press the A or V key to select Add Address 7 Press the OK key Add Address appears 8 Press the A or V key to select Group 9 Press the OK key This displays the screen for editing groups NOTE If the maximum number of groups has already been registered the screen will display Registered numbers exceeded and return to the Address Book 10 Enter each item and then press the OK key Registered is display
212. k Set Security Level Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select I F Block Set 4 Press the OK key The I F Block Set menu appears I F Block Set Mm USB Host USB Device Option I F Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select USB Device 8 147 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key USB Device appears USB Device CH Unblock Block 7 Press the A or V key to select Unblock or Block 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the System menu Optional interface Optional interface card setting This locks and protects the optional interface slot The default setting is Unblock Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting A 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt gt OK select System Report Counter A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and Bia press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 Press the OK key The System menu appears System gt 0m Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select I F Block Set 4 Press the OK key The I F Block Set menu appears I F Block Set mMm USB Host USB Device Option I F 5 Press the A or V key to select Option I F 8 148 Default Setting System Menu 6 Pr
213. k Setting menu WSD Scan Setup Select whether or not to use WSD Scan The default setting is On Use the procedure below to setup the WSD SCAN setting The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select System and press the OK key Report Counter A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and tt press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System menu appears System Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 8 133 Network Setting TCP IP Settings NetWare AppleTalk WSD Print Setup Exit lt gt OK Default Setting System Menu Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select WSD SCAN Press the OK key The WSD SCAN menu appears Press the A or V key to select On or Off Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Settings menu Select whether or not to use WSD Print The default setting is On Use the procedure below to setup the WSD PRINT setting The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed Sys Menu Count lt Report Counter Login User Name Login Password Login 0l Network Setting I
214. k Setup 8 132 e Protocol Detail 8 136 LAN Interface Setup Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used The default setting is Auto Use the procedure below to select the interface 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select System and press the OK key Report Counter A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name password with administrator privileges to log in and A press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System menu appears 0l Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 4 Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Network Setting gt ol TCP IP Setting NetWare AppleTalk 5 Press the A or V key to select LAN Interface 8 120 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key LAN Interface appears LAN Interface 10Base Half 10Base Full 7 Press the A or V key to select the desired LAN interface The available LAN interfaces are as follows Auto 10Base Half 10Base Full 100Base Half 100Base Full 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu 8 Set up TCP IP to connect to the Windows network Set the IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses The default settings are TCP IP Protocol On DHCP On Bonjour Off T
215. l press End Scan the Right Select key Copying begins 3 14 Basic Operation Collate Copying The machine can collate at the same time as it copies You can use the Collate copy function for tasks such as those shown below Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of copies as required according to page number 3 Original The procedure for using collate copying is explained below 1 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Collate Duplex 2 Press the A or V key to select Collate 3 Press the OK key Collate appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Off or On Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen 6 Use the numeric keys to enter the number of copies and press the Start key Copying begins 3 15 Printing Printing from Applications Basic Operation Follow the steps below to print documents from applications NOTE To print the document from applications install the printing system driver on your computer from the supplied DVD ROM Product Library Printer Name a Status Idle Find Printer Type Where E Print to file Comment Manual duplex Page range Copies All Number of copies fl Current page Selection Pages Le m W Collate Enter page numbers and or page ranges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 Print what Document I Zoom 5 Pages per sheet
216. l Specifications Appendix 21 Machine Appendix 18 Index Printer Appendix 20 Scanner Appendix 20 Specifying Destination 3 26 Status Job Cancel 7 1 Status Page 8 93 Appendix 24 Subnet Mask Appendix 24 Support tray section of the multi purpose tray 1 5 Switching the Language 2 9 8 3 Switching Unit of Measurement 8 24 Symbols i System Menu 8 1 T TCP IP Appendix 24 TEL connector 1 6 Toner container 1 4 Toner container lock lever 1 4 Top cover 1 4 1 6 Trade Names xxii TWAIN Appendix 24 U Unusable Time 8 40 USB Appendix 24 USB Cable Connecting 2 9 USB Interface 2 4 USB interface connector 1 6 USB Memory Printing Documents 6 2 Removing 6 8 Saving Documents 6 6 TIFF Print 6 3 XPS FitTo Page 6 4 USB memory slot 1 4 User Login Administration 11 2 Index 5 Adding 11 6 Changing Properties 11 9 Displaying Network User Propertiy 11 12 Enabling Disabling 11 2 Enabling Disabling Group Authentication 11 11 Login 11 5 Logout 11 5 Unknown login user name Job 11 13 Index W Z Waste Toner Box 1 6 Zoom Copying WIA Appendix 25 Auto Zoom 3 10 WSD Scan 5 19 Manual Zoom 3 10 Preset Zoom 3 10 X Zoom Mode a Copy 3 10 5 5 XPS Send 5 5 File formats 5 10 8 53 Saving documents to Removable USB Memory 6 6 Index 6 QUALITY CERTIFICATE This machine has passed all quality controls and final inspection TA Triumph Adler GmbH Ohechaussee 235 22848 Norderstedt Germa
217. l indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol Q Alert of required action Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection Remove the power plug from the outlet Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing fee required NOTE An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function Contents Contents CIC EENE E EE E EE feds aoa wt spe ap ea E E cocaine A EE E E tahk oo V Menu MAD 4253 2 ora acd a eee eo eer a ean a E E r RE A AE A viii ENVLONMON srg corat cet aA os tee Sted cha beth ata a aaa Bia ok Se aaa a a a Sema XV Cautions when handling consumables 0 0 000 ccc ee eee eee ee XV LaSer SIEV UOC e 25a 5 vs al hiss dat ac ein ae eae ta to aati a OG yh A eS Ah Seo T xvii Legal Restriction on Copying Scanning 0 eee ee xvii Legal and Safety Information a na aaan 0 ce eens xviii 1 Part Names Deratloni Panel rreraren iren a a ad Ea mee N a Sad eo a Sd chee See 1 2 POAC TV sace paaa au Seer cs tactics ce heh ths detent chh Gon arte ee ese sche Se enacts a ac oa feeder 1 4 2 Preparation before Use Check bundled itemS
218. l mean the digitally encoded machine readable scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights styles and versions of letters numerals characters and symbols Typefaces solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging Under the terms of this License Agreement you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers you need to acquire a multi user license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging Monotype Imaging retains all rights title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces except that you may make one backup copy You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefac
219. lays the current setting when there is a corresponding menu that can be selected using the left or right Select keys Displays the title of the corresponding menu that can be selected using the left or right Select keys Displays the number of copies 7 Displays the paper size to be copied T Displays the number of destinations 9 Displays the destination 3 6 Basic Operation Copying Follow the steps as below for basic copying 1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key indicator is off NOTE If the Message Display is turned off press the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor NOTE For loading instructions refer to Loading Originals on page 2 54 3 The paper source for copying is the location displayed on Ready to copy the panel Copies 1 When you need to change the paper source use the Paper Selection Vm Paper Selection menu If Auto is selected the most suitable paper source is automatically selected 4as p Plain 2 a5 D pion For specifying the paper source refer to Paper Selection on page 4 3 4 Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity Specify the desired number up to 999 Press the Start key to start copying 3 7 6 Adjusting Density Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying Adjust density using 7 levels Basic Operation Remove the finished copies from the top tray Opt
220. le below 2 a a Letter Legal Statement Executive Oficio Il A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 Folio 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 Custom Plain 105 g m or less Transparency Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 106 g m and more High Quality Custom 1 8 Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8 10 for selecting Custom Paper Size Media Type Refer to Paper Weight on page 8 16 for selecting Custom 1 8 from To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 21 NOTE To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page 8 16 Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for manual paper feed 1 Sys Menu Count 0m system User Job Account 05 Common Settings Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound Exit Orig Paper Set gt 00 Custom Orig Size Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears Press the A or V key to select
221. lect key 3 The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select User Login Set 5 Press the OK key The User Login Set menu appears 6 Press the A or V key to select Local User List 7 Press the OK key Local User List appears 8 Press Menu the Right Select key press the A or V key to select Add User and then press the OK key 9 Enter the user name and press the OK key enter the login user name in the next screen and then press the OK key amp UserOl Detail Local User List 2 amp DeviceAdmin e Admin 3 6 Detail Login Password SSCCRCREREEE SE 4 6 Detail E mailAddress kk kA abcdef jp Edit Detail Access Level Administrator Change Detail Account Name ee RD Center Change 10 11 12 13 14 15 Management Press the A or V key to select Exit and then press the OK key Select Detail and press the OK key to see information of the registered users In Local User List press the A or V key to select the added user and then press the OK key Press the lt or gt key to select Login Password press Edit the Right Select key enter the login password and then press the OK key Enter the same login password to confirm and press the OK key Press the gt key to select E mailAddress press Edit the Right Select key enter the e mail address and then press the OK key Press the gt gt
222. lected job Status Processing NOTE You can also check the job information by pressing Menu the Right Select key and selecting Detail in the menu that appears Press the lt or gt key to switch the display to other information items The items displayed are as follows Status status of job Accepted Time Job Name Job Type User Name Page and Copy number of pages and copies to be printed Original Page number of pages of the original 7 Sender Info When complete job name not displayed in detailed information When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form press Detail the Right Select key to see the complete job name Press the OK key to return to the original screen The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen me twee 2 Type Icons that indicate the job type Copy job mPrinter job L MFAX reception 4 ME mail reception E Job from Document Box Report List Data from Removable Memory 4 Status Status of job Printing Il Print Waiting no icon Pausing print job or error Ber Preferential print job is running Mee Suspended because preferential print job is running Status Job Cancel Send Job Status screen 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu Status a appears Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status Pause 2 Press the A or V key to select Send Job Status 3 Press the OK key Se
223. leted is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu 22 Press the A or V key to select Subnet Mask 23 Press the OK key Subnet Mask appears 24 Use the arrow keys to enter the Subnet Mask Press the lt or gt key to move the cursor position horizontally Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to enter the Subnet Mask Each 3 digits can be set between 000 and 255 IMPORTANT When the DHCP Setting page 8 126 is On the current Subnet Mask is displayed and cannot be changed When setting an Subnet Mask set the DHCP Setting page 8 126 to Off 25 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu 26 Press the A or V key to select Default Gateway 8 124 Default Setting System Menu 27 Press the OK key Default Gateway appears Default Gateway m el 000 000 000 28 Use the arrow keys to enter the Default Gateway Press the lt or gt key to move the cursor position horizontally Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to enter the Default Gateway Each 3 digits can be set between 000 and 255 IMPORTANT When the DHCP Setting page 8 126 is On the current Default Gateway is displayed and cannot be changed When setting an Default Gateway set the DHCP Setting 8 page 8 126 to Off 29 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu 8 125 DHCP Settings Default Setting System M
224. llows Solid Line Draws solid border lines Dotted Line Draws dotted border lines Positioning Mark Puts a mark on the border line position Use the procedure below to select the default value for border line 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default lt M Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Detail Setting 6 Press the OK key The Detail Setting menu appears Detail Setting a OK 2 in 1 layout 4 in 1 Layout Border Line Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select Border Line 8 60 Orig Binding Border Line Solid Line Dotted Line 8 9 10 Default Setting System Menu Press the OK key Border Line appears Press the A or V key to select None Solid Line Dotted Line or Positioning Mark Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu Select the default value for the binding edge of the original when 2 sided gt gt 1 sided or 2 sided gt gt 2 sided is selected for Duplex Items available for the default
225. low 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot AIIIN ANI ANTI 2 Press the Document Box key The Document Box menu appears 3 Press the A or V key to select USB Memory Document Box Sub Address Polling Box USB Memory 4 Press the OK key USB Memory appears USB Memory Store File Folder 1 AFile 1 Menu Select 5 Press the A or V key to select Store File NOTE To save the data in the folder of USB memory press the A or V key to select the folder and then press Select the Right Select key followed by the OK key The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels including the root folder 6 6 Ready to scan A4 4 1 Sided 2 Sided 300x300dp1 ScanRes Document Box 6 Press the OK key The basic screen appears Change the original type file format etc as necessary For changing scan settings refer to Sending Functions on page 5 7 7 Press the Start key The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory IMPORTANT When removing the USB memory ensure that you use the correct removal procedure as described in Removing USB Memory on page 6 8 6 7 Removing USB Memory Remove the USB memory Document Box IMPORTANT Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory Document Box a OK Sub Address Box Polling Box USB Memory USB Memory Store File Folder 1 AFile 1 Menu
226. ltimate Workstation domain ABCDNET Logon domain ABCDNET COM Open Timeout Csec gt The command completed successfully C Users james smith gt Creating a Shared Folder Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows NOTE If there is a workgroup in System Properties configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel Appearance and Personalization and then Folder Options Ease of Access Center Accommodate low vision Use screen reader Turn on easy access keys Turn High Contrast on or off Wt Folder Options D pecity single or double click to open Show hidden files and folders Fonts FA Preview delete or show and hide fonts Change Font Settings Adjust ClearType text NVIDIA Control Panel o Windows XP click My Computer and select Folder Options in Tools 2 Click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard Recommended in Advanced settings Folder Options E e Folder views You can apply the view such as Details or Icons that you are using for this folder to all folders of this type _ y to Folde Reset Folders Advanced settings Launch folder windows in a separate process A Restore previous folder windows at logon v Show drive letters Show encrypted or compressed NTFS files in color V Show pop up description for folder and desktop items v Show preview han
227. me Original Pages number of pages of the original Color B amp W color mode of the original Sender Info destination information Status Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press Detail the Right Select key in Job Name to see the complete job name Press the OK key to return to the Original screen When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press Detail the Right Select key in Sender Info to see the complete destination information Press the OK key to return to the original screen The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen Ce 2 Type Icons that indicate the job type m Storing Job Scan 4 amp Storing Job FAX 4 Storing Job Printer LB Job name or file name is displayed 4 Status Status of job F Storing Data no icon Storing Waiting Checking Job History Check the history of completed jobs Status Job Cancel NOTE Job history is also available by Embedded Web Server or Network Print Monitor from the computer Available Job History Screens The job histories are displayed separately in three screens Print Jobs Send Jobs Store Jobs and Scheduled Jobs The following job histories are available Print Job Send Job Store Job Scheduled Job Displaying Print Job Log Status 0 Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status Pause Print Job Log Sai OK 0006 a
228. menu appears Press the A or V key to select DHCP 8 122 Default Setting System Menu 13 Press the OK key DHCP appears 14 Press the A or V key to select Off and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu 15 Press the A or V key to select Bonjour IPv4 Setting DHCP Bonjour IP Address 16 Press the OK key Bonjour appears 8 17 Press the A or V key to select Off and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu 18 Press the A or V key to select IP Address IPv4 Setting a OK DHCP Bonjour IP Address 19 Press the OK key IP Address appears IP Address pala OK ele 000 000 000 20 Use the arrow keys to enter the IP address Press the lt or gt key to move the cursor position horizontally 8 123 IP Address 2D LAO OT Oo IPv4 Setting a OK IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway EXit Subnet Mask a OK el 000 000 000 IPv4 Setting ad OK IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Default Setting System Menu Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to enter the IP Address Each 3 digits can be set between 000 and 255 IMPORTANT When the DHCP Setting page 8 126 is On the current IP address is displayed and cannot be changed When setting an IP address set the DHCP Setting page 8 126 to Off 21 Press the OK key Comp
229. mit exceeded Job is canceled Memory is full Print job cannot be processed completely Maximum Number of scanned pages Job is canceled Print overrun Job is paused KPDL error Job is canceled USB memory error Job is canceled No multi copies Press OK e Auto Error Clear ON OFF Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting N 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count V 0m select Common Settings System User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings Language Default Screen Sound EXit 3 Pressthe A or V key to select Timer Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and o press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 8 32 Default Setting System Menu 4 The Timer Settings menu appears Timer Setting gt 0m Sleep Timer PanelReset Timer Low Power Timer EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Auto Err Clear 6 Press the OK key Auto Err Clear appears Auto Err Clear M M 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu 8 e Error Clear Timer If you select On for Auto Error
230. mp maury s da AA 0007 amp tom s da OK 0008 amp susan s da OK Detail Job histories to be displayed e Copy e Printer FAX reception E mail reception Job Report List Printing data from removable memory FAX PC SMB FTP E mail Application Multiple destination Scan FAX Printer Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu appears Press the A or V key to select Print Job Log Press the OK key Print Job Log appears Press the A or V key to check the print log Status Job Cancel A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job OK Job completed normally Job error Job aborted NOTE For details of other items refer to Print Job Status Screen on page 2 Press the OK key or Detail the Right Select key to 0006 Detail check the detailed information of the selected print log Result Press the lt or gt key to switch the display to other BErOr A i information items The items displayed are as follows 00100 Result Accepted Time End Time Job Name Job Type User Name Page and Copy number of pages and copies to be printed Original Page number of pages of the original Sender Info destination information When complete job name not displayed in detailed information When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form press Detail the Right Select key to see the complete job name Press the OK key to
231. mpleted is displayed and the screen returns to the User Job Account menu 11 14 Management Job Accounting Job accounting Manages the copy print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations e Manageability of up to 20 individual accounts e Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits between 0 and 99999999 for security e Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID e Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined e Restricting the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 copies e Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined First Job Accounting Setup Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup Enable job accounting page 11 75 v Add an account page 11 18 v Log out page 11 17 v Other users log in for operations page 11 17 Enabling Disabling Job Accounting Enable job accounting Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting setting 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit operation panel System Menu Counter O Sys Menu Count gt 0 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name 0 password
232. n 1 Inthe Destination menu press the A or V key to select Destination ai OK Register Confirmation Register 2 Press the OK key Register appears Register 01 Address Book Address Entry A or V key to select Address Book and then press the OK key This displays the address book Select your desired destination To select a destination from the address book press the g NOTE For selecting a destination from the address book refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 26 To directly enter a destination press the A or V key to select Address Entry and then press the OK key This displays an entry screen Enter the destination address directly 3 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the Completed screen returns to the Destination menu NOTE If the address of the selected destination has been Register changed after you selected the destination from the address Address Book book is displayed before Address Entry Refer to 0J address Entry Confirming Current Destination on page 7 14 and reconfirm the destination address 7 15 Status Job Cancel Automatic Job Log History Transmission This function automatically sends the job log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged Use the procedure below to set automatic job log history transmission F 1 Inthe Job Log History menu press the A or V key to Job Log History Vm select Auto Sending
233. n envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through Before purchasing envelopes in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled Thus keep the package sealed until you are ready to use them Keep the following points in mind Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive In addition do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes off in the machine Do not use envelopes with certain special features For example do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a String to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film covered window If paper jams occur load fewer envelopes at once To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes do not allow more than ten envelopes remain in the inner tray at once Thick Paper Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray fan it and align the edges Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams NOTE If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed load the paper in the multi purpose tray
234. n warning message appear click Continue Installer Discover Printing System Choose the printing system you would like to install Device Details IPv6 3 You can customize the print system name in the installation settings window This will be the name displayed in the Printer window and in the printer lists displayed in applications Specify whether to share the print system name or set the print system as an existing printer and then click Next IMPORTANT Step 3 only appears if the print system is connected via a network It does not appear if the print system is connected via a USB at the time of the first installation Installer Printer Settings Type a name for your printer Some programs do not support printer and server name combinations longer than 31 characters Printing system name Share your printer with other users To share this printer type a share name 4 Awindow appears in which you can check the settings Check the settings carefully and then click Install NOTE If the Windows security window appears click Install this driver software anyway 5 Amessage appears saying that the printer has been installed successfully Click Finish to exit the printer installation wizard and return the DVD ROM main menu If the device setup dialog box appears after you click Finish you can specify the settings for items such as optional features installed in the print system Y
235. n written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjn cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This
236. nd Job Status appears Press the Send Job Status A or V key to check the send queue 0010 4066764333 OO11 MBroadcast OO1T7 O324256345 Cancel Press the OK key to check detailed information of the 0011 Detail selected job Status SEEE NOTE You can also check the job information by pressing Menu the Right Select key and selecting Detail in the menu that appears Press the lt or gt key to switch the display to other information items The items displayed are as follows Status status of job Accepted Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages number of pages of the original Color B amp W color mode of the original Destination Status Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press Detail the Right Select key in Job Name to see the complete job name Press the OK key to return to the original screen When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information When there is only one destination press Detail the Right Select key in Destination to see the complete destination name Press the OK key to return to the original screen When there are two or more destinations press List the Right Select key in Destination to display the destination list Press the A or V key to select the desired destination and press the OK key This displays the complete name of the destination Press the OK key to return to the destination list Pr
237. nd Scan the Right Select key The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below Original Size Original Image EXit Continuous Scan lt gt OK Press the Send key Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Continuous Scan Press the OK key Continuous Scan appears Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending Specify the destination Place the original and press the Start key Place the next original and press the Start key Scan the remaining originals by the same procedure When you have scanned all the originals press End scan the Right Select key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 16 Sending Functions File Name Entry This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images You can specify a default for the document name Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu Sad OK Color Selection OU Original Size Oo Original Image O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select File Name Entry Press the OK key File Name Entry appears File Name Entry J doch NOTE Refer to Character
238. nd the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu Auto Sleep If no job runs for a certain period of time automatically enter Sleep Mode Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 8 for Sleep Mode e Auto Sleep ON OFF Select whether to use Auto Sleep or not The default setting is On NOTE Time remaining before Auto Sleep can be modified as necessary Use the procedure below to specify the auto sleep setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Common Settings System User Job Account 05 Common Settings 8 34 Default Setting System Menu 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings Language Default Screen Sound EXit 3 Pressthe A or V key to select Timer Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and E a press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 4 The Timer Settings menu appears Timer Setting lt gt 0m Ol Err Clear Timer Sleep Timer PanelReset Timer Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Auto Sleep 6 Press the OK key Auto Sleep appears Auto Sleep 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu e Sleep Timer If you select On for Auto Sleep set
239. nding 9 5 Sending Functions NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 6 Sending Functions Duplex Sending Select the type and binding of original depending on the original The table below lists the binding directions for each original type en O e o e 2 sided Sheet Original 2 sided Binding Left Right Top Edge Top Binding Top Top Edge Left Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals 5 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals on the document processor 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu ai OK 01 Color Selection O Original Size o Original Image O0 Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Duplex 5 Press the OK key Duplex appears 01 1 sided 2 sided 6 Press the A or V key to select 1 sided or 2 sided If you select 2 sided press Detail the Right Select key select the binding edge and press the OK key and then select the original setting orientation on the next screen 7 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 8 pecify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 7 Sending Functions Original Orientation To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly specify the
240. ner box clean the internal parts For instructions refer to Cleaning on page 9 2 NOTE Return the exhausted waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations Prolonged Non Use and Moving of the Machine Prolonged Non use If you ever leave the machine unused for a long period of time remove the power cord from the wall outlet We recommend you consult with your dealer about the additional actions you should take to avoid possible damage that may occur when the machine is used next time Moving the Machine When you move the machine e Move it gently e Keep it as level as possible to avoid spilling toner inside the machine e Be sure to consult a service technician before attempting long distance transportation of the machine WARNING If you ship the machine remove and pack the developer unit in a plastic bag and ship them separately from the machine Replacing the maintenance kit MK 370 When the print position shifts out of place or originals are not feeded components must be replaced Contact your Service Representative and purchase the maintenance kit Follow the procedure below to replace the maintenance kit 9 8 Maintenance Replace the paper feed roller 1 Open the left cover of the document processor 2 Lift the lever to release the lock 3 Move the front side and remove the paper feed roller
241. network parameters as appropriate for your PC and your network environment For details of the procedure refer to the Network Setup on page 8 120 or Network Security on page 8 139 NOTE When Embedded Web Server is used network parameters and security settings can be conveniently changed and checked from your PC For more information refer to Embedded Web Server Settings for E mail on page 2 28 System Network TCP IP TCP IP On Off Setting Settings SNMPv3 On Off FTP Server On Off FTP Client On Off Port number 21 MB On Off SNMP On Off i SMTP E mail TX On Off POP3 E mail RX On Off RAW Port On Off P O On Off On Off Port number 631 IPP Over SSL On Off HTTP On Off HTTPS On Off LDAP On Off 2 14 Preparation before Use Frame Type IPSec IPSec Rule Setting Secure SSL Protocol l IPP Security IPP IPP over SSL IPPoverSSL only HTTP Security HTTP HTTPS HTTPS only Off LDAP Security LDAPv3 TLS LDAP over SSL LAN Interface Auto 10Base Half 10Base Full 100Base Half 100Base Full NOTE After all network related settings have been done turn the machine OFF and ON again This is mandatory to make the settings effective 2 15 Preparation before Use Installing Software Ensure the printer is plugged in and connected to the PC before installing the printing system driver from the DVD ROM Installing the Software in Windows If you are connecting this printer to a Windo
242. ng is not necessary to register when using the machine possesses an IP address or host name that you have specified during installation of WIA Driver 1 Click Start Control Panel and then Scanners and Cameras For Windows 7 in the search box type scanners and cameras and then click Scanners and Cameras 2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers and press Properties If you do not see your device in the list make sure it is connected to the computer and turned on then choose Refresh Scanners and Cameras Kyocera WIA Driver Refresh Add Device Scan Profiles Do I need to use this to install my scanner or camera NOTE If Windows Security and User Account Control are displayed no trouble should be found with operation after installing the driver and software we have provided Continue installation 3 Click the Settings tab and select Image Compression and the Compression Level If user login administration is invalid go to Step 5 WA Driver Properties General Color Management Settings About Image Compression Color Authentication No Compression Level 3 Image Compression Gray Black amp White 5 Compression Level Account ID 3 Y Low Metric NOTE When the machine s IP address is unknown contact Administrator 4 Select the checkbox beside Authentication enter Login User Name up to 64 characters and Password up to 64 characte
243. nnot start the job performed due to insufficient memory Press the OK key to print the scanned pages Press the Cancel key to cancel the printing job Match the paper type Are envelopes printing using Press the two envelope buttons to and the envelope the envelpe mode change the paper feed mode to switch position envelope mode Match the position of Is either of the envelope Press the both switches 2 47 envelope swiches switches is pressed The developer unit is Is the developer unit Contact your service technician not installed installed correctly Replace Process Unit Replacement of the parts in the maintenance kit is necessary at every 300 000 pages of printing and requires professional servicing Contact your service technician 10 11 Troubleshooting Responding to an Error Lamp Flashes If an error lamp flashes press Status Job Cancel to check an error message If the message is not indicated on the Message Display when Status Job Cancel is pressed or the error lamp flashes for 1 5 seconds check the following Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page Cannot send fax Is the modular cord Connect the modular cord connected correctly correctly Is Permitted FAX No or Check Permitted FAX No FAX Operation Guide Permitted ID No and Permitted ID No Chapter 6 Registering registered correctly Permit FAX No and Registering Permit ID No Has a communication Check error codes in
244. nt lt Report Counter Login User Name Login Password Login 0l Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level EXit In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The System menu appears Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 8 140 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Network Setting V Secure Protocol Host Name LAN Interface EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Secure Protocol 6 Press the OK key Secure Protocol appears Secure Protocol m IPP Security HTTP Security EXit Press the A or V key to select SSL 8 Press the OK key SSL appears 9 Press the A or V key to select On or Off 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu IPP Security Specify the protocol to be used for IPP The default setting is PP IPP over SSL Use the procedure below to make the setting z 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select System and press the OK key Report Counter A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log
245. nter the account Login User Name W name of the destination PC Maury 9 Press the OK key Login Password appears Login Password 0 TELLLTILLLI 10 Enter the login password You have to enter the password of the account on the destination PC 11 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Check the connection Are you sure NOTE If the screen for confirming the entry of a new destination page 8 88 is set to On screens to confirm the entered host name and path name appear Enter the same host name and path name again and press the OK key on their respective screens Data to be entered are as follows NOTE You will be unable to send the data if you forget your login user name or login password of the destination PC Contact your administrator and check your login user name or login password 3 22 Basic Operation For send to folder SMB Data to be entered max characters Host Name Host name or IP address of the PC to Up to 64 3 SMB receive the data characters Path to the receiving folder such as Up to 128 follows characters For example User Sharename Login User User name to access the PC Up to 64 Name For example abcdnet james smith characters Login Password to access the PC Up to 64 Password characters To specify a port number different from the default 139 enter using the format host name port number e g E 140 For send to folder FTP Data to be ent
246. ny
247. oPrint Override A4 LTR EXit Press the A or V key to select Override A4 LTR 4 Press the OK key Override A4 LTR appears Override A4 LTR Sma OK 5 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu 8 78 Default Setting System Menu Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode The table below shows the available settings ew e Fee Bind Long Longer edge Edge bound Bind Short Shorter edge Edge bound Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select Printer Common Settings Copy Printer 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Be gt ale Press the A or V key to select Duplex 4 Press the OK key Duplex appears Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge 5 Press the A or V key to select Off Bind Long Edge or Bind Short Edge 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu 8 79 Copies Set the default number of copies from 1 to 999 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies Sys Menu Count lt Common Settings Copy Printer Printer Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit Copies 1 999 copies 1
248. oblems Before purchasing special paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper Appendix 14 Transparency OHP film Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing Transparencies must meet the following conditions Must withstand at least 190 C To avoid problems use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the machine If transparencies jam frequently at output try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected Cardstock Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray fan them and align the edges If the Hagaki paper is curled straighten it before loading Printing onto curled Hagaki may cause jams Use unfolded Oufuku Hagaki available at post offices Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Appendix 15 Envelopes Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes Due to the structure of envelopes printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases Thi
249. of moisture content bear in mind the following considerations e Store paper in a cool well ventilated place e Store paper flat and unopened in the package Once the package is opened reseal it if the paper is not to be used for a while e Store paper sealed in the original package and box Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors e Before using paper that has been stored keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours e Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat sunlight or dampness Other Paper Specifications Porosity The density of the paper fibers Stiffness Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine causing jams Curl Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened When paper passes through the fixing unit it curls upward slightly To deliver flat printouts load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray Static electricity During printing paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together Whiteness Paper whiteness affects print contrast Use whiter paper for sharper brighter copies Quality Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square edges are rough sheets are uncut or edges or co
250. of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened For more information refer to Auto Low Power Mode on page 2 8 Sleep The device automatically enters Sleep when 15 minutes have passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened For more information see Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2 8 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function This device includes 2 sided copying as a standard function For example by copying two 1 sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2 sided copy it is possible to lower the amount of paper used For more information see Duplex Copying on page 3 12 Paper Recycling This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this p N product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program ENERGY STAR xxiii About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contains the following chapters Chapter 1 Part Names Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys Chapter 2 Preparation before Use Explains adding paper placing originals connecting the machine and necessary configurations before first use Chapter
251. oks The following modes are available One sided to Two sided Produces two sided copies from one sided originals In case of an odd number of originals the back side of the last copy will be blank The following binding options are available A Binding Left Right Images on the second sides are not rotated B Binding Top Images on the second sides are rotated 180 Copies can be bound on the top edge facing the same orientation when turning the pages Copies each side of a two sided original onto two individual sheets The following binding options are available e Binding Left Right Images on the second sides are not rotated e Binding Top Images on the second sides are rotated 180 Two sided to Two sided Produces two sided copies from two sided originals NOTE The paper sizes supported in Two sided to Two sided are Legal Letter Oficio Il Executive A4 B5 AS and Folio Original 3 12 Basic Operation The procedure for using two sided duplex copying is explained below 1 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu Sad OK Paper Selection O Collate Duplex 2 Press the A or V key to select Duplex 3 Press the OK key Duplex appears 01 1 sided gt gt 1 sided 1 sided gt gt 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 1 sied 4 Press the A or V key to select the desired duplex copying mode 3 If you select 1 sided gt gt 2 sided press Detail
252. ompleted is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 18 Sending Functions WSD Scan WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD compatible computer NOTE For information on operating the computer refer to the operating system help for your computer To use WSD Scan WSD Scan Setup page 8 133 must be set to On in the network settings Installing Driver Software to the destination machine The example shows you how to install the driver software to a Windows Vista PC 1 Click Start and then Network in the computer 2 Right click the machine s icon and then click Install NOTE If the User Account Control window appears click Continue If the Found New Hardware window appears click Cancel 3 During the installation double click the icon shown on the task bar to display the Driver Software Installation screen When Your devices are ready to use is displayed on the Driver Software Installation screen the installation is completed Procedure using this machine 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen Displays the screen for sending NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear In this event press Cancel to display the screen for
253. operations Login User Name perform the following login operations Login Password Login 2 Press the OK key enter the login user name and then press the OK key 3 Press the V key to select Login Password press the OK key enter the login password and then press the OK key 4 Check the login user name and password are correct and press Login the Right Select key Logout To log out the machine press the Logout key to return to the login user name login password entry screen Logout Auto Logout Logout is automatically executed in the following cases e When the Power key is pressed to enter the sleep mode e When auto sleep is activated e When auto panel reset is activated e When auto low power mode is activated Management Adding a User This adds a new user You can add Up to 21 users including the default login user name The table below explains the user information to be registered ae User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list up to 32 characters Login User Enter the login user name to log in up to 32 Name characters The same login user name cannot be registered Login Enter the password to log in up to 64 characters Password Access Level Select Administrator or User for user access privileges Account Name Add an account where the user belongs The user who registered his her account name can log in without entering the account ID Refer to Job Ac
254. osite Colored Paper Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 of the Appendix In addition the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing up to 200 C or 392 F Preprinted Paper Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 9 of the Appendix The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing It must be resistant to silicone oil as well Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars Recycled Paper Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 of the Appendix however its whiteness may be considered separately NOTE Before purchasing recycled paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality Appendix 17 Specifications NOTE Specifications are subject to change without notice Machine E a Sheet Book 3 dimensional objects maximum original size Folio Legal Paper Weight 60 to 120 g m2 Duplex 60 to 120 g m2 Paper Type Front Cassette Plain Rough Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Colour Prepunched Letterhead High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Duplex Same as Simplex MP Tray Plain Transparency OHP film Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Colour Prepunched Letterhead Thick Envelope High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Paper Size Front Cassette Maximum 8 1 2 x 14 A4 Duplex 8 1 2 x 14 A4 Minimum 5 1
255. ou can also specify the device settings after you exit the installation For details refer to Device Settings in the printing system driver operation manual on the DVD ROM This completes the printing system driver installation procedure Follow the on screen instructions to restart the system if required 2 18 Preparation before Use Custom Mode Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port and select the software to be installed For example if you do not want fonts installed on your computer to be replaced select Custom Mode and deselect the Fonts checkbox in the utility tab 1 Select Custom Mode Installer Installation Method Choose how to install the software ess Mode Install the recommended printing software The printing system must be connected Custom Mode Create a custom installation Utilities Install printing system utilities only 2 Following the instructions in the install wizard window select the software packages to be installed and the specify the port etc For details refer to Custom Installation in the printing system driver operation manual on the DVD ROM Installer Discover Printing System Choose or discover the printing system to install Installation on a Macintosh This section explains how to install the printing system driver in Mac OS 1 Turnon the printer and the Macintosh 2 Insert the included DVD ROM Product Library into the DVD ROM drive
256. ou select On and press the OK key Frame Type appears Press the A or V key to select the desired frame type The available frame types are as follows Auto 802 3 Ether ll 802 2 SNAP Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu For detailed information on restarting the system refer to Restarting the System on page 8 119 Select the Apple Talk network connection The default setting is On Use the procedure below to setup the AppleTalk setting Sys Menu Count Report Counter Login User Name A lt v gt Login Password system Login Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit 1 In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The System menu appears 8 132 Default Setting System Menu Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 4 Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Network Setting lt 0 TCP IP Settings NetWare AppleTalk Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select AppleTalk 6 Press the OK key AppleTalk appears AppleTalk Off 7 Press the A or V key to select On or Off and then press the OK key 8 Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Networ
257. ource A 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings System User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set 4 Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears Orig Paper Set gt M Custom Orig Size Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Def PaperSource 6 Press the OK key Def PaperSource appears Def PaperSurce mMm 0i Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 7 Press the A or V key to select the paper source to be used preferentially 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu 8 20 Default Setting System Menu Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched Preprint and Letterhead punch holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions In such a case select Adj PrintDirect to adjust the print direction When paper orientation is not important select Speed Priority The table below lists the available settings and their details E oe Adj PrintDirect Adjust print direction Print speed is a little slower Select this item to print on Prepunched Preprint and Letterhead Speed Prio
258. ow to operate FAX check transmission results print reports and use Network FAX Embedded Web Server Operation Guide Printing System Driver User Guide Network FAX Driver Operation Guide Network Print Monitor Viewer User Guide Network Tool for Direct Printing Operation Guide PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user other individuals and surrounding objects and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine The symbols and their meanings are indicated below WARNING Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points CAUTION Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points Symbols The A symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol AN General warning AN Warning of danger of electrical shock AN Warning of high temperature The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol S Warning of prohibited action Q Disassembly prohibited The symbo
259. page 5 13 viii Send key Function Menu key Continued from Continued from previous previous page page Document Box key Document Box key When printing from USB memory Document Box key When saving to USB memory Function Menu key Function Menu key page 6 9 page 6 2 Encrypted PDF JobFinish Notice p FTP Encrypted TX page 5 23 File Separation page 5 24 Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Refer to the FAX Operation Guide page 3 15 page 4 3 page 3 12 page 5 17 page 4 14 page 4 17 page 6 3 page 6 4 page 5 15 page 5 2 page 5 12 page 5 14 page 5 5 page 5 8 page 5 16 page 5 10 page 5 17 page 5 21 a E page 5 13 page 5 7 Status Job Cancel key page 7 2 er shail P ane sisi System Menu zepo abies ae Counter key T R Admin Rpt Set Outgoing FAX Rpt Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Incoming FAX Rpt Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Result Rpt Send Result E mail Folder page 8 96 Sle Ne page 8 96 FAX RX Result Refer to the FAX Operation Guide JobFinish Notice Refer to the FAX Operation Guide aon ig nen HIS EOV P Sint eee eee System Menu counter Counter key Continued from previous page Fc ce Settings Network TCP IP Setting system IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Protocol Detail NetWare AppleTalk WSD SCAN WSD PRINT IPSec Secure Protocol Host Name L
260. pears 10 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width X 11 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig Paper Set menu Default Setting System Menu Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 and optional paper feeders Cassette 2 to 4 The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below E eee Paper Size Letter Legal Statement Executive Oficio Il A4 A5 A6 B5 Folio 16K ISO B5 Envelope C5 Custom Media Type Plain 105 g m or less Rough Recycled Preprint Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead High Quality Custom 1 8 Cassette 1 only To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Paper Weight on page 8 16 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 21 Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each cassette NOTE When the paper size dial on a cassette is set to OTHER a paper size can be set for the cassette 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm 0l Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set 4 Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appe
261. pient as a file attached to an E mail message default settings User and destination registration Printing Network l Send SMB Saves the scanned image as a data file on your PC Network Send FTP sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP TWAIN Scanning WIA Scanning TWAIN and WIA are standardized interface for communication between software applications and image acquisition devices 2 3 Preparation before Use Preparing Necessary Cables The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use Available Standard Interfaces Printer Scanner Network interface LAN 10Base T or Network FAX 100Base TX Shielded Printer TWAIN USB interface USB2 0 compatible cable Scanning WIA Hi Speed USB compliant Scanning Max 5 0 m Shielded i Network FAX and FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed For details on Network FAX refer to the FAX Operation Guide 2 4 Preparation before Use Connecting Cables Follow the steps below to connect cables to the machine 1 Turn the main power switch off O 2 Connect the machine to the PC or your network device When using the network interface remove the cap When connecting the network cable configure the network For details refer to Network Setup LAN Cable Connection on page 2 14
262. placed on the platen 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default lt mMm Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Orig Orientation 6 Press the OK key Orig Orientation appears Orig Orientation iTop Edge Top 02 i iTOD Edge Left 7 Press the A or V key to select f amp Top Edge Top or 3 Top Edge Left 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu 8 48 Default Setting System Menu EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default The table below shows the available settings o ae No EcoPrint performed NOTE Refer to page 4 8 for EcoPrrint Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm 0l Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key
263. product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 Ifyou include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjn cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence xxi Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 2 11 12 Software shal
264. r Same as OrigSize 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu 8 70 Default Setting System Menu Auto Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected select whether automatic zoom reduce zoom is performed The table below shows the available settings The default setting is Off No zoom performed copied in original size Automatic zoom performed as appropriate Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt gt select Copy User Job Account Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Copy menu appears Photo Processing Paper Selection AutoPaperSelect Exit Press the A or V key to select Auto Priority 4 Press the OK key AutoPaperSelect appears Priority gt 5 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu 8 71 Default Setting System Menu Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key you can quickly set the function when using copy functions You can register one of the following functions to each key e None e Paper Selection e Collate e Duplex e Zoom e Combine e Original Size e Orig Orientation e Original Image e Density e EcoPrint e Continuous
265. r Propertiy Management Press the OK key Group Auth appears Press the A or V key to select On or Off Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the User Job Account menu Use the procedure below to display the property of the user logged on using the network authentication This menu can be used only when Netwk Authentic is selected as the user authentication method NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters System Menu Counter 9 Sys Menu Count gt 0 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit Login User Name Login Password Login User Job Account 0m User Login Set Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit operation panel Press the A or V key to select User Job Account A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The User Job Account menu appears Press the A or V key to select User Login Set 11 12 Management 5 Press the OK key The User Login Set menu appears User Login Set Mm User Login Local User List Group Auth Exit 6 Press the A or V key to select NW User Property 7 Press the OK key NW User Property appears NW User Property gt 8 Press the A or V key to select On or Off 9 Press t
266. r V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Adjust Maint Document Box 0 Edit Destination Adjust Maint 2 Press the OK key The Adjust Maint menu appears Adjust Maint gt 0m 0i Copy Denst Adj Send Box Density Correct Bk Line EXit Press the A or V key to select Service Setting 4 Press the OK key The Service Setting menu appears Service Setting gt Mm 01 Service Status Network Status New Developer Bxit 5 Press the A or V key to select New Developer 8 101 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears New Developer Are you sure 7 Press Yes the Left Select key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Service Setting menu Auto Drum Refresh When the machine is turned on or is woken up from Low Power mode or Sleep mode the drum is sometimes automatically refreshed Automatic drum refreshing is carried out to maintain printing quality and allows for the ambient temperature and humidity Use this setting to specify the duration of automatic drum refreshing ee Disables automatic drum refreshing Standard Sets the standard duration for automatic drum refreshing Sets a longer time for automatic drum refreshing If the printed image is faint due to moisture set Long A 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Adjust Maint Document Box 1 Edit Destination
267. r V key to select Default Setting 7 Press the OK key The Default Setting menu appears 8 Press the A or V key to select Counter Limit 9 Press the OK key Counter Limit appears 10 Press the A or V key to select the item for which you want to set the default restriction on the number of sheets and then press the OK key 11 29 Management 7 11 Use the numeric keys to enter the default restriction on Copy Restriction the number of sheets and then press the OK key 1 9999999 123456 Completed IS displayed and the screen returns to Counter Limit 12 Repeat steps 10 to 11 set other default restrictions on the number of sheets 11 30 Management Counting the Number of Pages Printed This counts the number of pages printed Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time Types of the counts are as follows Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed and the total number of pages used You can also use Duplex Pages and Combine Pages to check the number of pages used Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying faxing and other functions as well as the total number of pages scanned FAX TX Pages Displays the number of pages faxed FAX TX Time Displays the total duration of fax transmissions i Only on products
268. re to clear the jam Press V to display the next step or press A to display the previous step Press the OK key to exit the online help message display 10 13 Troubleshooting MP Tray Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the MP tray 1 Remove the paper jammed at the MP tray 2 Open and close the top cover and front cover to clear the error Cassette Paper Feeder Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette or paper feeder 1 Pull out the cassette or optional paper feeder 2 Remove any partially fed paper NOTE Check to see if paper is loaded correctly If not reload the paper 3 Push the cassette back in securely The printer warms up and resumes printing 10 14 Troubleshooting Duplexer Paper is jammed in the duplexer Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below CAUTION Do not touch parts in this area because A it may result in burn injury Pull the cassette all the way out of the printer 1 2 Open the duplexer s cover and remove any jammed paper 3 Push the cassette back in securely The machine warms up and resumes printing Inside the Machine Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside the machine Open the top cover and front cover 1 a AIG 7S Ss N AY 2 Za ZBZZ UII A AX AT 10 15 Troubleshooting Lift the developer unit together with the toner container N
269. report of transmission result when a transmission is complete The table below shows the available settings The default setting is Error Only ee ee No result report printed On Result report automatically printed Transmitted images can also be attached Error Only Result report printed only when a transmission ends in an error If two or more destinations are registered the reports are printed only for the destinations with the errors Transmitted images can also be attached Use the procedure below to send a Result Report 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt gt OK select Report Counter system 8 96 Report Print Admin Rpt Set Result Rpt Set Exit Result Rpt Set M Send Result FAX RX Result JobFinish Notice EXit Send Result 0l E mail Folder FAX CancelBeforesend EXit lt gt OK E mail Folder Off On 03 Error Only Default Setting System Menu 2 Press the OK key The Report menu appears 3 Press the A or V key to select Result Rpt Set 4 Press the OK key The Result Rpt Set menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select Send Result The Send Result menu appears 6 Press the A or V key to select E mail Folder FAX or CancelBeforeSend Selected menu appears NOTE Selecting CancelBeforeSend can be specified whether the machine prints the report when canceling the operation before sending
270. ress the A or V key to select Use Numeric Key or Select Character Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu 8 66 RAM Disk Mode When optional memory is installed a RAM disk can be created and its size can be set Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box Default Setting System Menu The procedure for setting the RAM Disk Mode is explained below 1 Sys Menu Count 0m System User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound Exit 4 RAM Disk Mode pala OK 5 l 6 RAM Disk Size lt gt OK 1 64 eT T 8 Restart Are you sure In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select RAM Disk Mode Press the OK key RAM Disk Mode appears Press the A or V key to select Off or On If On is selected and the OK key is pressed the RAM disk size screen appears If Off is selected and the OK key is pressed proceed to step 8 Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to enter the size of the RAM disk A confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key The machine is restarted 8 67 Default Setting System Menu Copy Settings The following settings are available for copying functions e Photo Processing 8 68 e Paper Selection
271. return to the original screen When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press Detail the Right Select key in Sender Info to see the complete destination information Press the OK key to return to the original screen Displaying Send Job Log Status Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status Pause Send Job Log 0004 MBroadcast 0003 60756545865 0002 MMorgan home A Detail 0004 Detail Result OK Status Job Cancel Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu appears Press the A or V key to select Send Job Log Press the OK key Send Job Log appears Press the A or V key to check the send log A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job OK Job completed normally Job error Job aborted NOTE For details of other items refer to Send Job Status screen on page 7 4 Press the OK key or Detail the Right Select key to check the detailed information of the selected send log Press the lt or gt key to switch the display to other information items The items displayed are as follows Result Accepted Time End Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages number of pages of the original Color B amp W color mode of the original Destination 7 10 Status Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press Detail the Right Select key in Job Nam
272. rity Give the job speed top priority and disregard the paper orientation Select this item when paper orientation is not important If you select Adj PrintDirect load paper according to the steps below Example copying on Letterhead i E Original Finished Cassette l Original Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray NOTE When loading cover paper in a multi purpose tray load the face on which printing is supposed to be done upward When loading cover paper in a cassette load the face on which printing is supposed to be done down Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types T 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings System User Job Account 05 Common Settings 8 21 Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound Exit Orig Paper Set m Custom Orig Size Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit SpcialPaper Act gt 0 Adj PrintDirect Speed Priority SpcialPaper Act gt 0 Adj PrintDirect 02 Speed Priority Default Setting System Menu 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears 3 Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set 4 Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select SpcialPaper Act 6 Press the OK key SpcialPaper Act appears 7 Press the A or V key
273. rners are crushed In order to prevent these problems be especially careful when you cut the paper yourself Appendix 13 Packaging Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes Ideally the packaging itself should have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture Specially treated paper We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper even if it conforms to the basic specifications When you use these kinds of paper purchase a small amount first as a sample to test e Glossy paper e Watermarked paper e Paper with an uneven surface e Perforated paper Special Paper This section describes printing onto special paper and print media The following paper and media can be used e Transparency OHP film e Rough e Vellum e Labels e Recycled e Preprinted e Bond e Cardstock e Color Colour e Prepunched e Letterhead e Envelope e Thick e High Quality e Custom 1 to 8 When using these paper and media choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers such as laser printers Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies thick paper envelopes cardstocks and label paper Choosing Special Paper Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper Thus special paper is more likely than regular paper to cause printing pr
274. rocedure for utilizing Document Box e Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory 6 2 e Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB 6 6 e Removing USB MemMory ccccceccceceseeeceeeeseeeaeeees 6 8 Printing rom a Job BOX siseusessinsgevendse nawiverevotdiduerehioeiee 6 9 6 1 Document Box Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory without having to use a computer Limitations e The following file types can be printed e PDF file Version 1 5 e TIFF file TIFF V6 TTN2 format e XPS file The files you wish to print should have an extension pdf tif xps Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot If connected via a USB hub the machine may not operate correctly Printing Print documents stored in the removable USB memory 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot AIA AA ANI ANTM 2 Press the Document Box key The Document Box menu appears 3 Press the A or V key to select USB Memory Document Box Sub Address Polling Box 4 Press the OK key USB Memory appears USB Memory Store File Folder 1 AFile 1 Menu Select 5 Press the A or V key to select the the file you want to print Select a folder and press the OK key to view the f
275. rs and then click OK 2 26 Preparation before Use 5 Click Close The machine is registered to the PC 2 27 Preparation before Use Embedded Web Server Settings for E mail Embedded Web Server is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing the settings for security network printing E mail transmission and advanced networking NOTE Here information on the FAX settings has been omitted For more information on using the FAX refer to the FAX Operation Guide FAX functions available only ion products with the fax function installed The procedure for accessing Embedded Web Server is explained below 1 2 Launch your Web browser In the Address or Location bar enter the machine s IP address E g http 192 168 48 21 The web page displays basic information about the machine and Embedded Web Server as well as their current status LE hits s 192 168 48 216 Start Basic Printer Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen The values for each category must be set separately Enter the correct password to access pages other than the startup page The default setting is adminOO The password can be changed For details refer to the Embedded Web Server Operation Guide 2 28 Sending E mail Preparation before Use Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E mail attachments To use this funct
276. ry Method on Appendix 5 for Login details on entering characters x 2 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt gt select Report Counter system 3 Press the OK key The Report menu appears 0l Report Print Result Rpt Set Job Log History Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Log History Report Vu Admin Rpt Set Result Rpt Set Job Log History 5 Press the OK key The Job Log History menu appears Job Log History Mm Auto Sending Send History Destination Exit 7 13 Setting the destination Set the destination to which job log histories are sent Use the procedure below to set the destination Job Log History Mm Auto Sending Send History Destination Destination Confirmation Register Confirming Current Destination Destination Confirmation Register Dest Confirm omg OK MMorgan ttt tttttt Status Job Cancel 1 Inthe Job Log History menu press the A or V key to select Destination 2 Press the OK key The Destination menu appears 1 Inthe Destination menu press the A or V key to select Confirmation 2 Press the OK key Dest Confirm appears NOTE Press the OK key to edit delete the current destination Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 3 Press Exit the Right Select key The basic screen reappears 14 Status Job Cancel Registering Destinatio
277. s HTTP Fide fat controls connections for a Windows emertence gt Custom Custom n e 6 Select TCP select Specific local ports enter 139 and click Next Does tha ate anolyte TCP or UDP cP gt UDP Dose thet n e apply bo al local porte oF epectic local porte 2 38 Preparation before Use Guunwuwal eer O Select Allow the connection and click Next Action Sow fy Ove achon to de taken whan a Conmecton matches he condors species n the n e Stepa e What action should be taken when a commection matches the specfied conditions oe gt Aiow the conection O qn Tha ntes cammectons that are protected wen Psec as wei m mose are not J fte Allow the connection if it is secure s This includes only Conmections that have been sutherticated by using IPsec Connections wi be secured using the settings m Psec properties and nies n the Camnection Sec rty Rije node Dock the connection sY E about amp k a _ 7 as inane a 8 Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click Next Profile Ceecty me pries fae wrech thes nie op ra Stepa o Fuk When does thus nde apiy o moo a Ace Domain o Profle Applet when computer is Connected fo ts Comorate doman Neve J Private Aggies when a computer is Connected to a private network locatior ted to a pubic neterock bostan oy c er fie S z 9 Enter Scan to SMB in Name and click Finish iP Ne
278. screen Press OK the Right Select key Completed is displayed and the folder SMB FTP address is registered If the connection failed Cannot connect is displayed Press OK the Right Select key The screen shown in step 2 reappears Check and re enter the destination 8 109 Default Setting System Menu Address Number Address Number is an ID for a destination When creating a new destination the smallest unused address number is automatically allocated You can select any available number out of 100 numbers for individuals and 20 numbers for groups 1 Press the lt or gt key to display Address Number Detail gt 0 Address Number 6 6 053 2 Press Edit the Right Select key An entry screen address Number appears OOL L20 3 Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to enter the address number 4 Press the OK key The address number is registered NOTE If you enter an address number that is already registered the screen will display This address number is already registered and return to the screen of step 2 Adding a Group Compile two or more individuals into a group Designations in the group can be added at the same time When adding a group a maximum of 20 groups can be added in the Address Book NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges Before adding a group in the Address Boo
279. seconds Blank sheets are Are the originals loaded When placing originals on the ejected correctly platen place them face down and align them with the slit glass When placing originals in the document processor place them face up Is the machine in Manual Select the correct density level 5 13 RENS mode When changing the default density Printouts are too light level adjust the density manually and choose the desired level Is the toner distributed evenly Shake the toner container from 9 5 within the toner container side to side about several times Is there a message indicating Replace the toner container 9 5 the addition of toner Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper Is EcoPrint mode enabled Disable EcoPrint mode 4 4 800 Make sure the paper type setting is Ea R 12 correct the paper being used a 14 Printouts are too dark Is the machine in Auto Set the correct density level for Density mode auto density Is the machine in Manual Select the correct density level 5 13 Density mode 10 2 Copies have a moire pattern dots grouped together in patterns and not aligned uniformly Troubleshooting Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Is the original a printed Set the image quality to Photo 5 1 photograph Printouts are not Did you choose appropriate Select appropriate image quality 5 12 clear image quality for the original Printouts are dirty Printo
280. select Off for Auto Panel Reset the time display does not appear Use the procedure below to set the reset time Sys Menu Count 0m System User Job Account 05 Common Settings Common Settings Language Default Screen Sound Exit Login User Name Login Password Login Timer Setting lt gt 0m Err Clear Timer Sleep Timer PanelReset Timer Exit In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Timer Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The Timer Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Panel Reset Timer 8 38 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key Panel Reset Timer appears PanelReset Timer M 5 495 ETN lt lt 7 Press the A or V key to set the Panel Reset Timer Set the amount of time before resetting the message display on the panel in seconds You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu Low Power Timer You can specify the amount of time to wait before Low Power Mode Specify a value from 1 240 minutes 1 minute increments The default setting is 2 minutes For more
281. sending 3 Press the A or V key to select WSD Scan Send to a OK Folder SMB BFolder FTP WWSD Scan 4 Press the OK key WSD Scan appears WSD Scan pai OK From Computer From Oper Panel 5 19 Sending Functions 5 Press the A or V key to select From Oper Panel 6 Select the destination computer from the computer list Select Computer lt 0 Bicomputer01 Press Detail the Right Select key to see the computer02 information of the selected computer computer03 Cancel Detail 7 Press the OK key to confirm the destination and then Press start Key press the Start key Transmission starts Computer01 NOTE To change the destination computer press the Back key and then press Yes the Left Select key This brings you back to step 6 NOTE To use WSD Scan from your computer press From Computer in step 5 and then scan the original from the computer 5 20 Sending Functions Job Finish Notice This feature sends an e mail providing notification that transmission has been completed Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings Function Menu Sa OK Color Selection UO Original Size Oo Original Image O Exit JobFinish Notice Destination Address Entry Address Book MMaury MMorgan Address Entry 0 aR ame Se IC Cle Gs joi ABC Text 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function M
282. sette 1 Size Cassette 1 Type lt gt OK EXit lt gt OK Cassette 1 Size Legal H Statement Preparation before Use Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears Press the A or V key to select from Cassette 1 Set to Cassette 4 Set NOTE Cassette 2 Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 are shown when the optional cassettes are installed 10 Follow the steps below when you select the main unit cassette Cassette 1 Operate in a similar fashion when you select an optional cassette Cassette 2 to 4 Press the OK key The Cassette 1 Set menu appears Press the A or V key to select Cassette 1 Size Press the OK key Cassette 1 Size appears Press the A or V key to select the desired paper size and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set menu 2 50 Preparation before Use 11 Press the A or V key to select Cassette 1 Type Cassette 1 Set mMm Cassette 1 Size Cassette 1 Type 12 Press the OK key Cassette 1 Type appears Cassette 1 Type mMm Rough Recycled 13 Press the A or V key to select the desired paper type and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set menu Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray To fix the type of paper to b
283. shorten the useful life of the machine Choose paper with a smooth and even surface however avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit Ingredient Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80 pulp i e not more than 20 of the total paper content consists of cotton or other fibers Supported Paper Sizes Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine Measurements in the table take into account a 0 7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width Corner angles must be 90 0 2 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 3 7 8 x 8 7 8 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 Envelope Monarch 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 wezme Size Entry 70 x 148 to 216 x 356 mm CT Except for the optional cassettes Smoothness The paper surface should be smooth but it must be uncoated With paper that is too smooth and slippery several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once causing jams Appendix 12 Basis Weight In countries that use the metric system basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area In the United States basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream 500 sheets of p
284. sor If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the document processor clean the slit glass with the supplied cleaning cloth The message Clean the slit glass may be displayed if the slit glass requires cleaning NOTE Wipe the slit glasses with the dry cloth Do not use water soap or solvents for cleaning 1 Open the document processor and wipe the slit glass a 2 Wipe the white guide b on the document processor 3 Close the document processor 9 2 Maintenance Cleaning the Machine To avoid print quality problems the interior of the machine must be cleaned with every toner container and waste Open the top cover and front cover 1 toner box replacement ANN AK ANN NN N A N Lift the developer unit together with the toner container 2 out of the machine 3 Use a lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the qe registration roller metal s553 Z7 ss ows oo Oo eoe o es wA AIA ANY ANT 4 Insert the developer unit together with the toner container back into the machine NN AA A AW AN Ny A W 5 Close the top cover and front cover 9 3 Maintenance 6 Open the left cover Use a lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the vents 7 Close the left cover 8 Use a lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the vent on the right side of the machine Ze N zm AUU 9 4
285. sor at one time the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job With this function originals are scanned until you press End Scan the Right Select key The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Collate Duplex Press the A or V key to select Continuous Scan 4 Press the OK key Continuous Scan appears Continuous Scan Mm 5 Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying 6 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen and press the Start key 7 Place the next original and press the Start key Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals After scanning all originals press End Scan the Right Select key to start copying NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 13 Copying Functions Job Finish Notice Sends a notice by E mail when a copy job is complete User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish NOTE PC should be configured in advance so that E mail can be used Example of Job Finish Notice To h_pttr owl net net Subject 1234 Job end report mail Job No 000002 Result OK
286. splayed Ready to copy is displayed on the Message Display Used to emphasize a key word For more information refer to Sleep and phrase or references to Auto Sleep on page 2 8 additional information Indicates supplemental information or operations for reference Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid IMPORTANT problems Caution Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or AKAA machine breakdown and how to CAUTION deal with it XXV 1 Part Names This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys s OPEALION Paneline 1 2 WIAG INIA E eena res oednicus date ataara din iaunasinarduniniceetadataeinceonndeamaxcons 1 4 1 1 Part Names Operation Panel Displays the Address Book screen where you can add edit and delete destinations Calls the previous destination Also used to enter a Displays the System Menu Counter menu screen pause when entering a FAX number where you can check the system settings and counters Displays the Confirm Destination screen where you can edit and delete destinations Displays the Status screen where you Displays the Add Destination screen where you Can add can check the status print a status destinations report and pause or cancel the job in process Swi witches between on hook and off hook when Displays the Copy manually sending a FAX screen where you can make settings required Message Display Check what is
287. ss Book on page 3 27 5 Press the OK key The selected destination is registered to the one touch key Registered is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen 8 116 Default Setting System Menu Editing One touch Key Edit delete the destinations you added to One touch Key Use the procedure below to edit the one touch key 1 Inthe Send or FAX screen press the one touch key Select Key No 0m where you want to edit the destination and hold it 2 seconds or longer Select Key Set appears The screen shown is the one when No 1 No 12 is pressed and held 2 Press the A or V key to select the key number where you want to edit the destination 3 Press the OK key The Key Edit appears D tail Delete 4 Press the A or V key to select Edit NOTE If you select Delete here and press the OK key you can delete the registration of the destination If you press Yes the Left Select key in the screen that appears Completed is displayed and the registration of the destination is deleted 5 Press the OK key The Address Book list screen addressbook gt 0m appears eeDesign amp Fiala amp Maury 6 Press the A or V key to select the destination you want to newly register NOTE If you want to search from the Address Book refer to Search in Address Book on page 3 27 7 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Overwrite Are you sure No 1 Yes 8 117 Defaul
288. ss the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default lt M Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Detail Setting 6 Press the OK key The Detail Setting menu appears Detail Setting a OK 2 in 1 layout Ay anw i Layout Border Line EXit 7 Press the A or V key to select Color TIFF Comp 8 Press the OK key Color TIFF Comp appears Color TIFF Comp Mm TTN2 9 Press the A or V key to select TIFF V6 or TTN2 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu 8 65 Login Operation Default Setting System Menu Specify the character entry method in the login screen that appears when user management is enabled ee a ae Use Numeric Key Use the numeric keys to select and enter characters select Character Enter characters by selecting them from the character palette that appears Use the procedure below to adjust the Login Operation 1 Sys Menu Count 0m System User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound Exit 4 Login Operation lt gt ol Use Numeric Key Select Character 5 6 In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Login Operation Press the OK key Login Operation appears P
289. straighten it before loading Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam CAUTION If you copy onto used paper paper already used for copying do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together This may damage the machine NOTE If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled turn the stack in the cassette upside down Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag NOTE If you use special paper such as letterhead paper with holes or paper with pre prints like logo or company name refer to Paper on Appendix 9 2 41 Preparation before Use Loading Paper in the Cassettes The standard cassette will each hold plain paper recycled paper or color paper The standard cassette holds up to 500 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m The following paper sizes are supported Legal Oficio II Letter Executive Statement A4 B5 A5 A6 Folio and 16K IMPORTANT e You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating Such papers may cause paper jams or other faults e When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper
290. streaks Is the slit glass dirty Clean the slit glass appear on prints The inside of the machine Check the toner container and if 9 5 may be dirty necessary replace Refresh drum drum 8 102 102 The top edge or back The inside of the machine DaT ER the inside of the machine Ca 3 of the paper is dirty may be dirty Part of the image is Is the developer unit Attach the developer unit correctly periodically faint or attached correctly SNOWS WOIE INES Open and then close the rear cover 10 4 Troubleshooting Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions olla Cannot send via SMB Is the network cable Connect the correct network cable 2 5 connected securely Have the network settings for Configure the TCP IP settings 8 121 the equipment been properly configured properly Have the folder sharing Check sharing settings and access settings been configured privileges under the folder properly properties Has the SMB protocol been Set the SMB protocol setting to 3 21 set to On On Has the Host Name been Check the name of the computer to 2 37 entered properly which data is being sent Has the Path been entered Check the share name for the properly shared folder Has the Login User Name Check the coman name and login been entered properly user name Has the same domain name Delete the domain name and been used for the Host backslash from the Login Name and Login User User Nam
291. sts machine conditions such as the memory capacity total number of prints and scans and paper source settings Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0 The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address The term prefix refers to something added to the beginning and in this context indicates the first section of the IP address When an IP address is written the length of the network address can indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash For example 24 in the address 133 210 2 0 24 In this way 133 210 2 0 24 denotes the IP address 133 210 2 0 with a 24 bit prefix network section This new network address section originally part of the host address made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address When you enter the subnet mask be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over a network TCP IP IPv6 TCP IP IPv6 is based on the current Internet protocol TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 is the next generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4 while also introducing other improv
292. t 5 Press the A or V key to select File Name Entry 8 50 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key File Name Entry appears Enter the File name Entry document name up to 32 characters doc if 7 Press the OK key Additional Info appears Additional Info gt m Job No 04 Job No Date Date Job No 8 Press the A or V key to select None Date JobNo JobNo Date or Date JobNo 9 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu Subject Body Set the subject and body automatically entered default subject and body when sending the scanned originals by E mail NOTE e Refer to Send as E mail on page 3 19 e Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters Use the procedure below to set the default e mail subject and message body 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound EXit 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 8 51 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default lt M Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Subject Body 6 Press the OK
293. t gt Control Panel Home Y Action Center Review your computer s status and resolve issues System and Securi r t W Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer pro Network and Internet Restore your computer to an earlier time Nindow all Check firewall status System View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Inde Allow remote access See the name of this computer Device Manager Hardware and Sound Programs Allow a program through Windows Firewall User Accounts and Family Safety Appearance and Personalization Pk Clock Language and Region Windows Update Ease of Access Turn automatic updating on or off Check for updates View installed updates Power Options Require a password when the computer wakes Change what the power buttons Change when the computer sleeps 6 amp D dy gt Control Panel System and Security Windows Firewall X Search Contre Control Panel Home Help protect your computer with Windows Firewall Allow a Seite BELLE ur feature Windows Firewall can help prevent hackers or malicious software from gain through Windows Firewall through the Internet or a network Change notification settings How does a firewall help protect my computer Turn Windows Firewall on or What are network locations off Restore defaults m 2 Home or work private networks Advanced settings Networks
294. t System Menu operation panel Counter When you are performing user management and have Login User Name not logged in a login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password to log in Login Password NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for Login details on entering characters 2 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 3 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm 01 Language Default Screen Sound Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set 5 Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears Orig Paper Set m 01 Custom Orig Size Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit 6 Press the A or V key to select MP Tray Set 7 Press the OK key The MP Tray Set menu appears MP Tray Set ag OK MP Tray Size MP Tray Type Exit 8 Press the A or V key to select MP Tray Size 2 52 MP Tray Size Legal H Statement MP Tray Set MP Tray Size MP Tray Type MP Tray Type Transparency Rough 10 11 12 13 Preparation before Use Press the OK key MP Tray Size appears Press the A or V key to select the desired paper size and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the MP Tray Set menu Press the A or V key to select MP Tray Type Press t
295. t lt 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings Language Default Screen Sound fi Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Date Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and ee press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 8 27 Date Setting gt 0m Date Time Date Format Time Zone EXit Date Time lt gt 0m Year Month Day 01 01 Time Zone Greenwich Date Time lt 0 Hour Min Second 45 50 Time Zone Greenwich 10 Default Setting System Menu The Date Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Date Time Press the OK key The screen to enter the date of Date Time appears Set the date Press the lt or gt key to move to the item Year Month Day you want to enter Press the A or V key to set each item Press the OK key The screen to enter the time of Date Time appears Set the time Press the lt or gt key to move to the item Hour Min Second you want to enter Press the A or V key to set each item Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu NOTE If you try to change the date time when a trial application page 8 750 is running th
296. t 0 User Login Set Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit 5 Press the OK key The User Login Set menu appears User Login Set 2 mMm User Login Local User List Group Auth Exit 6 Press the A or V key to select Local User List Local User List amp DeviceAdmin e Admin amp Userl Local User List amp DeviceAdmin Userl Detail User Name Userl Local User List amp DeviceAdmin Menu Detail Edit Add User lt gt OK lt gt OK lt gt OK lt gt OK 7 Management Press the OK key Local User List appears The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited Changing user information 1 Press the A or V key to select the user whose information you want to change and then press the OK key In the same fashion as registering a new user press the lt or gt key to select the desired item press Edit the Right Select key change information and then press the OK key Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary After completing changing the user information press the OK key again The overwrite confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key The user information is changed and the screen returns to Local User List Deleting a user 1 2 Press the A or V key to select the user you want to delete and then press Menu the Right Select key Press the A or V key to select Delete and then press the O
297. t Setting System Menu Font List Check the font samples installed in the machine asswor Selection EENI FSET EEREEEEREEENI asswor Selection Baal EENI Baal Baal Baal Baal Baal BEHI Baal Baal FSET BRRRRRERRRREE BERRERRRRRREE BERRRRRRRRREE BERGER EE BERRRRERRRREE BERGER RRRRREE BERGER RREEE BERRRRRRRRREE BERGER RREE Use the procedure below to print a Menu Map Status Page Font List N 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count V select Report Counter System 2 Press the OK key The Report menu appears Report Print Admin Rpt Set Result Rpt Set Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Report Print 4 Press the OK key The Report Print menu appears Report Print gt 0m Status Page Font List Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Menu Map Status Page or Font List 8 94 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Print Are you sure The screen shown is the one when Status Page is selected Status Page Yes 7 Press Yes the Left Select key The selected report is output Accepted is displayed and the screen returns to the Report Print menu NOTE When acceptance of jobs is prohibited Print storing functions are restricted now is displayed and the output is canceled Service Status Page More de
298. t Setting System Menu Press Yes the Left Select key The selected destination is registered to the one touch key overwriting the previous one Registered is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen 8 118 Default Setting System Menu Restarting the System Restart the printer without turning the main power switch off Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine Same as the computer restart Use the procedure below to restart the system 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count V select System and press the OK key Report Counter A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and ty Ty press Login the Right Select key Login Password 2 The System menu appears Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level EXit Press the A or V key to select Restart 4 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Restart Are you sure 5 Press Yes the Left Select key The printer is restarted If you press No the Right Select key the printer does not restart and the screen returns to the System menu 8 119 Default Setting System Menu Network Setup The following network settings are available e LAN Interface Setup 8 120 e TCP IP IPv4 Setup 8 121 e TCP IP IPv6 Setup 8 130 e NetWare Setup 8 131 e AppleTal
299. tailed information is available than on the Status Page Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose Network Status Page 8 Check the information including network interface firmware version network address and protocol Network Status Page MFP Firmware Version Use the procedure below to print a Service Status Network Status i 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count V select Adjust Maint Document Box 0 Edit Destination Adjust Maint 2 Press the OK key The Adjust Maint menu appears Adjust Maint gt 0m Copy Denst Adj Send Box Density Correct Bk Line Exit 8 95 Default Setting System Menu Press the A or V key to select Service Setting 4 Press the OK key Service Setting appears Service Setting gt M Service Status Network Status New Developer EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Service Status or Network Status 6 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Print The screen shown is the one when Network Status is selected Are you sure Network Status Yes 7 Press Yes the Left Select key The selected report is output Accepted is displayed and the screen returns to the Service Setting menu NOTE When acceptance of jobs is prohibited Print storing functions are restricted now is displayed and the output is canceled Send Result Report Automatically print a
300. tainer Power Requirement 120 V Specification Model 120 V 60 Hz more than 9 5 A 230 V Specification Model 220 to 240V 50 60 Hz more than 5 1 A Power Consumption Maximum Standard 1032 W U S A Canada 1046 W European countries With options 1037 W U S A Canada 1063 W European countries Power Without FAX Consump tion During printing Standard 679 9 W U S A Canada 676 6 W European countries With options 713 3 W U S A Canada 688 2 W European countries With FAX Standard 680 9 W U S A Canada 677 4 W European countries With options 719 0 W U S A Canada 703 5 W European countries Power Without FAX Consump tion During standby Standard 94 5 W U S A Canada 95 8 W European countries With options 101 6 W U S A Canada 103 7 W European countries With FAX Standard 104 6 W U S A Canada 97 9 W European countries With options 113 0 W U S A Canada 102 1 W European countries Power Without FAX Consump tion Low power mode Standard 34 0 W U S A Canada 72 7 W European countries With options 37 0 W U S A Canada 73 1 W European countries With FAX Standard 42 8 W U S A Canada 74 8 W European countries With options 43 3 W U S A Canada 75 6 W European countries Without FAX Power Consump tion Sleep mode Standard 6 8 W U S A Canada 6 9 W European countries With options 8 8 W U S A Canada 9 1 W European countri
301. tects et Se weg etn Bes Roden ce Gwe ees A eta ad A wae aed 8 150 Maintenance CICaning 33 seas boo eee Sa eh eh a ROE ae RS See ed ee ee wo ee ee 9 2 Toner Container Replacement 0 0 0000 eee eee ees 9 5 Replacing the Waste Toner Box 2 2 0c eee eee 9 7 Replacing the maintenance kit MK 370 2 0 0 0000 0c eee 9 8 Troubleshooting Solving Malfunctions iee sn ac Greed cokes ee aed et wk ee See aed eat ee ee eee 10 2 iii Contents 11 Responding to Error Message S 0 0 0c ee eee eee 10 6 Clearing Paper JamSic acd ho n amp odd eae boo hans ae ho eee EE 10 13 Management User Login Administration 0 0 0 0 ee eens 11 2 JOD ACCOUNIING gase tte achat hater ae ee ees eae So hadi eer ss 11 15 Checking the Counter 2 0 0 0 0 ccc ee eee enna 11 37 Appendix Optional EQuip Ment 25 5 cacns wwe aecer ete e eee ade di eee aaa oes Appendix 2 Character Entry Method 0 000 Appendix 5 FAI SM aie a fe eae ie etch MR cae ene ch I ae ak he A nk ate E oe encanta i a a to Appendix 9 SDECINCAUOMS neta 3 sci A ooh ee AE SoS Se aS aes ae Hee Appendix 18 PINES Tl Dice ti ss Ge See chat ot os a a a a ca site Ah abides at tM teak due eee Appendix 21 I TI ZOO Os acct a ce ccutal ot suited adi dine Sette Saas eS i a alee te ee aoe aera a Appendix 21 lOSSaly As tase est ee eae Re eo tnd Ae Ee hea eee Re ewe wae ea ee ee Appendix 22 WACO went Share Ss seta anes in Gabe aud ae Gea ONG OS ee RA ea ae tern
302. ted E nee cts dara hs ada etna 3 7 Printing Printing trom ADplICaliOnS n as406 40 6446 ee a a tee red ease edetes 3 16 SCMCING oa dared a etek ede eee i ead bed des WE BEd de Se aa ey ed Ee ee eee 3 18 Confirm Destination Screen csr riean tea ee eee eee 3 25 SHECIVING DESTINATION saites aaan i wie Oe eh a amp Kenw awh ee ek ede EA ed chai wee ate ob 3 26 Cancela JODS 332 22ace36 eta Gah Soe a ek dee tee E a GEES CA See aN lees hes 3 29 Checking Remaining Toner and Paper 0 0 0 0 cc ee ee ees 3 30 4 Copying Functions ONIGIN Gl SZE serra Cee eee Eee eae oe sab 1 Eee os teeter se Bee ee 4 2 Paper celeco sesira eke A nites eh teat dee itn ee Rr Sed de a Aida tee Saeed ack Beate Raden 4 3 Original OneniatiOns lt n7 cn etes 6 haces ata the eee eee ed dw Geet ol oe eed ea 4 6 OO I as atee a n tate abe Gade ne aod Ay gcum E hace Ge ge e e a e ied coe A wes 4 8 Combine MOC 2 422569 2340s dae BR Sew COE Eee cea GRS ti oot BPE SE eae eee tee 4 9 COMPUMUOUS SCANS edie sc tng Scie adhd Bonne di E acd ase aes Bows bie Bad al ded ad hana a he Oe ae cad Pecan ees ey 4 13 JOD IRIS INONCC c s 650 ti Gone Gare at Rate a es Ge ia no Bona ora RC ae eee a 4 14 FG INEGI oo eae chy eine Ea a wietaee nis a dow pie as chante Reade a O S E ee deka f 4 16 PANG OV CMIOC 20 2 tet Sake are oo eas hase BE Bae ee be eed Ba eee Reese s 4 17 10 Sending Functions ONGINGWW SIZE nain n ea aa alee eke cae wae owe oe waa arenes Ate es 5 2 CII ZC ere ohn
303. tem Driver Appendix 24 Printer Settings 8 74 Copies 8 80 CR Action 8 83 Duplex 8 79 EcoPrint 8 77 Emulation 8 74 Form Feed Timeout 8 82 LF Action 8 82 Orientation 8 81 Override A4 Letter 8 78 Printing 3 16 Printing from a Job Box 6 9 Printing from Applications 3 16 Printing Reports Sending Notice 8 93 Font List 8 94 Network Status Page 8 95 Service Status Page 8 95 Status Page 8 93 Transmission Result Reports 8 96 Private Print 6 9 Product Library 2 2 Q Quick Copy mode 6 10 Quick Setup Screen Changing Registration 8 72 8 86 8 90 R RAM Disk Mode 8 67 Index 4 Rear cover 1 6 Resolution Appendix 19 Appendix 20 Restarting the System 8 119 S Safety Conventions i SAFETY OF LASER BEAM USA xvii Scan Resolution 5 14 Default settings 8 43 Send File Format 5 10 Image Quality 5 12 Original Size Selection 5 2 Sending Size Selection 5 3 Setup 8 86 Sending Send as E mail 3 19 Send to Folder FTP 3 23 Send to Folder SMB 3 23 Sending E mail 2 29 Sending Functions 5 1 Sending Settings 8 86 Quick Setup Registration 8 86 Sending Size Selection 5 3 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending 3 28 Separator Cleaning 9 5 Setting Date and Time 2 11 Setup Copy 8 68 Date Timer 8 27 NetWare 8 131 Network 8 120 Printer 8 74 Send 8 86 Sleep 2 8 Slit Glass Cleaning 9 3 Slit glass 1 4 SMTP Appendix 24 Solving Malfunctions 10 2 Specifications Document Processor Appendix 21 Environmenta
304. th of the SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters If entering the name a DNS server address must also be configured The DNS server address may be entered on the TCP IP General tab SMTP Server Timeout Enter the default time out for the server in seconds Authentication Protocol Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP as the protocol The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000 Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a different account Login User Name When Other is selected for Authenticate the login user name set here will be used for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the login user name is 64 characters Login Password When Other is selected for Authenticate the password set here will be used for authentication The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters POP before SMTP Timeout Enter the timeout in seconds if you chose POP before SMTP as the Authentication shat This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established E mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E mail that can be sent in kilobytes When the value is 0 the limitation for E mail size is disabled Sender Address Enter the E mail address of the person responsible for the machine such as the machine administrator so that a reply or non delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine The sender address m
305. the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt gt OK select Send Copy Printer 2 Press the OK key The Send menu appears Select Key Set DestinationCheck EXit Press the A or V key to select Select Key Set 4 Press the OK key Select Key Set appears Select Key Set gt M 8 Right 5 Press the A or V key to select Left or Right 6 Press the OK key This displays the function selection Left lt 0 screen for the flexible key selected in step 5 The screen Color Selection shown is the one when Left is selected Original Size Original Image 7 Press the A or V key to select the function you want to register to the flexible key 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Send menu TE IMPORTANT If you try to set the function that is registered This function is to the other flexible key you cannot set it and This function is already registered already registered is displayed 8 87 Default Setting System Menu Document Box Settings The following settings are available for Document Box e Job Box 8 88 e Select Key Set 8 90 Job Box Job Box settings can be set Select settings for Quick Copy Jobs and Job Retention Deletion Quick Copy Jobs sets the number of files that can be saved using Quick Copy Job Ret Deletion sets the period of time a job retention file can be saved When a file has been saved for longer than the period it is automatically delete
306. the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep Options are between 1 and 240 minutes every one minute Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time The default setting is 75 minutes R 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count V 0m select Common Settings System User Job Account 05 Common Settings 8 35 2 Common Settings Language Default Screen Sound EXit 3 Login User Name lt M Login Password Login 4 Timer Setting gt 0m ol Err Clear Timer Sleep Timer PanelReset Timer Exit 5 6 Sleep Timer 1 240 Eee T 8 Default Setting System Menu Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Timer Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The Timer Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Sleep Timer Press the OK key Sleep Timer appears Press the A or V key to set the Sleep Timer Set the amount of time before entering the sleep state in minutes You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu 8 36 Auto Panel Reset Default Setting System Menu If no jobs are run for a certain period of time automatically reset settings and return to
307. the default setting NOTE Refer to page 8 42 for the default settings e Auto Panel Reset ON OFF Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting The default setting is On 1 Sys Menu Count gt 0 system User Job Account 05 Common Settings Common Settings Language Default Screen Sound Exit Login User Name Login Password Login Timer Setting gt G Err Clear Timer Sleep Timer PanelReset Timer Exit Auto Panel Reset M M In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears GE Press the A or V key to select Timer Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The Timer Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Auto Panel Reset Press the OK key Auto Panel Reset appears 8 37 Default Setting System Menu e Panel Reset Timer 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu If you select On for Auto Panel Reset set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset Options are between 5 and 495 seconds every five seconds The default setting is 90 seconds NOTE If you
308. the memory module out of the socket to remove Verifying the expanded memory To verify that the memory module is working properly test it by printing a status page Appendix 4 Character Entry Method In character entry screens use the procedure below to enter characters Keys Used Use the following keys to enter characters 1 2 6 ABC Function Menu o 1 2 GHI JKL PQRS TUV WXYZ aS A H DEF d ala T C Back 1 4 1 OK Key Press this key to finalize the entered character s 2 Clear Key Press this key to delete the character at the cursor position If the cursor is at the end of the line the character to the left of it is deleted 3 Back Key Press this key to return to the screen from which you invoked the character entry screen 4 Cursor Keys Use these to select the entry position or select a character from the character list 5 Numeric Keys Use these keys to select the character you want to enter 6 Reset Key Press this key to cancel the character entry procedure and return to the standby screen 7 Right Select Key Press this key to select the type of characters you want to enter When Text is displayed Appendix 5 Selecting Type of Characters To enter characters the following three types are available ABC To enter alphabets 123 To enter numerals Symbols To enter symbols In a character entry screen press Text the Right File name input Select key to select the t
309. the original orientation to use the following functions e Duplex Combine mode When placing originals on the platen Top Edge Top Top Edge Top Top Edge Left NOTE To change the default setting for the original orientation refer to Orig Orientation on page 8 48 4 6 Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen Collate Duplex Orig Orientation iTop Edge Top 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Orig Orientation 5 Press the OK key Orig Orientation appears 6 Press the A or V key to select Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left 7 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying 8 Press the Start key to start copying NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 7 Copying Functions EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high quality print is unnecessary The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu Sad OK Paper Selection O Collate Duplex 4 Press the A or V key to select
310. then Down Arranges from upper right to left Down then Left Arranges from upper right to bottom Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout A 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings System User Job Account 05 Common Settings 8 58 Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound Exit Function Default mMm Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution EXit Detail Setting Cmd OK 2 in 1 layout Ay ne 1 Layout Border Line EXit 4 in 1 Layout ald OK 0 4 Right then Down Ht Down then Right Left then Down Default Setting System Menu 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select Detail Setting 6 Press the OK key The Detail Setting menu appears 7 Press the A or V key to select 4 in 1 Layout 8 Press the OK key 4 in 1 Layout appears 9 Press the A or V key to select Right then Down t4 Down then Right Left then Down or 4 Down then Left 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu 8 59 Default Setting System Menu Border Line Select the default value for border line when 2 in 1 is selected for Combine Items available for the default value are a a as fo
311. tings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 8 54 Default Setting System Menu 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound EXit Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default gt mMm Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select File Separation 6 Press the OK key File Separation appears File Separation lt gt Fach Page 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or Each Page 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu TIFF Print Select the TIFF Print default The table below shows the available settings O o O o NOTE Refer to page 6 3 for TIFF Print Use the procedure below to set the default TIFF Print setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0m select Common Settings System User Job Account 05 Common Settings 8 55 Default Setting System Menu 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound EXit Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default gt mMm Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution EXit 5 Press the
312. tion on Private Print see Help in the printing system driver Gi The procedure for printing stored data is explained below 1 Press the Document Box key The Document Box menu Document Box a OK appears Sub Address Box Polling Box 2 Press the A or V key to select Job Box 3 Press the OK key The Job Box menu appears oi Private Quick Copy 4 Press the A or V key to select Private 5 Press the OK key The user selection menu appears Private amp Fiala 6 Press the A or V key to select the user 7 Press the OK key The print file selection menu appears amp Fiala A Data02 ADatal3 Menu 6 9 Document Box 8 Press the A or V key to select the file to be printed and then press Select the Right Select key The selected file will be marked If you need to add another file repeat this procedure to select the file NOTE To select all files press Menu the Left Select key and select Select All To deselect all files select Clear All ol Select All To show file details select Detail Clear All beta 9 Press the OK key The file print and delete selection menu appears Delete 10 Press the A or V key to select Print and press the OK key NOTE To delete the selected file without printing it select Delete and press the OK key The file deletion confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key Completed appears and the file is deleted 11 T
313. to 356 in 1 mm increments 210 to 356 in 1 mm increments 70 to 216 in 1 mm increments Y X Y X Y X 105 to 216 in 1mm increments y X Y X Y 148 to 356 in 1 mm increments NOTE When the paper size dial on a cassette is set to OTHER a paper size can be set for the cassette Custom paper sizes can be added for each paper source Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size Sys Menu Count 0m System User Job Account 05 Common Settings Common Settings Language Default Screen Sound Bxit lt gt OK Orig Paper Set gt M Custom Orig Size Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit 1 In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears 8 10 Custom PaperSize mMm Cassette 1 Size Cassette 2 Size Cassette 3 Size Size Entry Y aaa OK 5 83 14 02 T 14 02 Size Entry X ome OK 4 13 8 50 EERTE Default Setting System Menu 5 Press the A or V key to select Custom PaperSize 6 Press the OK key The Custom PaperSize menu appears 7 Select the paper source in which you want to set the custom size and press the OK key Size Entry Y appears 8 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length Y 9 Press the OK key Size Entry X ap
314. to R TtoB Arranges from left to right or top to bottom Arranges from right to left Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings System User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 8 57 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default lt M Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Detail Setting 6 Press the OK key The Detail Setting menu appears Detail Setting Cmd OK 2 in 1 layout Ay anw i Layout Border Line EXit 7 Press the A or V key to select 2 in 1 Layout 8 Press the OK key 2 in 1 Layout appears 2 Aa de Layout lt 0 Ol EH L to R fH T to B 02 R to L 9 Press the A or V key to select EH L to R E T to B or E R to L 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu 4 in 1 Layout Select the default value for layout when 4 in 1 is selected for Combine Items available for the default value are as follows a a ae Right then Down Arranges from upper left to right t4 Down then Right Arranges from upper left to bottom Left
315. to disable user login administration When Network Authentication is selected select Server Type v NTLM Kerberos or Ext for the server type and NTLM press the OK key 02 Kerberos If NTLM or Kerberos is selected for the server type Host Name fe enter the host name up to 64 characters and domain ia name up to 256 characters of the authentication server and press the OK key If Ext is selected for the server type enter the host name up to 64 characters and port number of the authentication server and press the OK key NOTE If the login user name and password are rejected check the following settings e Network Authentication setting of the machine e User property of the Authentication Server e Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings If the server type is Kerberos only domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the User Login Set menu Management Login Logout Once you enable user login administration a login user name and password entry screen appears each time you use this machine Login Log in using the procedure below NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Ifthe screen below appears during the
316. to the Function Default menu 8 46 Default Setting System Menu Collate Set the defaults for Collate The table below shows the available settings a a a Collate Collate not performed son Collate performed NOTE Refer to page 3 15 for Collate Offset Use the procedure below to set the default Collate Offset settings 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears c Common Settings mMm 0l Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default gt mMm 01 Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Collate 6 Press the OK key Collate appears 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu 8 47 Default Setting System Menu Orig Orientation Set the original orientation defaults The available default settings are shown below ae A Top Edge Top Select the original s top edge at the top Top Edge Left Select the original s top edge at the left Refer to page 4 6 for Original Orientation Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are
317. to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper IMPORTANT When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 57 If you are using a paper weight of 106 g m or more set the media type to Thick The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows e A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m recycled paper or color paper 100 sheets e Hagaki 1 sheet e OHP film 1 sheet e Envelope 5 sheets NOTE When you load custom size paper enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 57 When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper select the media type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 51 fF 1 Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops P C VE FILL IE aa oe E j 2 Pull out the extension 3 Adjust the position of the paper width guides on the MP VF ps las tray Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP tray For standard paper sizes slide the paper width guides to the position marked correspondingly 2 45 Preparation before Use 4 Align the paper with the paper width guides and insert as far as it will go NOTE If the paper
318. u 8 Press the A or V key to select the file to be printed and then press Select the Right Select key The selected file will be marked If you need to add another file repeat this procedure to select the file NOTE To select all files press Menu the Left Select key and select Select All To deselect all files select Clear All 01 Select All To show file details select Detail Clear All Detail Delete Copies oes OK 1 999 Ml copies Document Box 9 Press the OK key The file print and delete selection menu appears 10 Press the A or V key to select Print and press the OK key NOTE To delete the selected file without printing it select Delete and press the OK key The file deletion confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key Completed appears and the file is deleted 11 The number of copies screen appears Set the number of copies and press the OK key 12 The file print confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key Accepted appears and printing begins 6 12 7 Status Job Cancel This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and pause or resume the jobs being processed or waiting to be printed This chapter also explains how to check the status of devices CHECKING JOD SlAlUS uicceectccxssccrdseccexseporeiesehececveanenocee 7 2 CHECKING JOD FISLONY siteictceeMenigusineduteusssuetsaseviveleads 7 8
319. u appears Function Menu ai OK Paper Selection O Collate ee 2 Press the A or V key to select Print Override 3 Press the OK key Print Override appears Print Override aa OK 4 Press the A or V key to select On 5 Press the OK key Completed is displayed the machine is put into the interruption copy mode and the basic screen appears 6 Perform the interrupt copy job in the same fashion as a normal copy job When the interrupt copy job is completed the machine resumes the suspended print job NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 18 Copying Functions 5 Sending Functions This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals si 0 Ghz lin 4 a 5 2 s SSOMGING OZE sre eds ante ae Acne Bidet teva teed 5 3 s LOONE AA 5 5 DUPICX SeNdiINO scoccsscczsdestaowtieulastiee eran nr iar oa 5 7 s Original Orientation sss eea 5 8 s PIC FPO eian a E NTT 5 10 OQNdiNallmage erea al eae tat 5 12 Adjusting Dons ivesssencooten ceotvsrexeterwteteticoreseeaes 5 13 SCAM ResolutlONM esinen E 5 14 e Color Grayscale Black and White Selection 5 15 s ICOMUMIOUS SCAN ieie marcato dela tenictae dager 5 16 PUGINAMG ENUY sinctoutecencosssesvendvedtaerledewentestovoldvereinieeuta 5 17 e Subject and Body Entry cccccccccsceseeeeeeeeeeeesees 5 18 Wo DCA nan 5 19 JODFNSTNOUCO nicesi r a 5 21 IEP ENGIPA TA esre AE ins 5
320. u want to stop and then press Menu the Right Select key Menu appears Cancel Job 4 Press the A or V key to select Cancel Job and then Job will be canceled press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Are you sure 0008 copy Yes I No 5 Press Yes the Right Select key The screen displays Canceling and returns to the output queue of the selected job type after the job is canceled To cancel other jobs repeat steps 3 to 5 3 29 Basic Operation Checking Remaining Toner and Paper You can check the remaining amount of toner and that of paper in each feeder cassette Checking Remaining Toner 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu status appears 01 Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status Pause 2 Press the A or V key to select Toner Status 3 Press the OK key Toner Status appears Toner Status The remaining amount of toner is displayed in one of 10 o BREEOOOO00 1002 er Checking Remaining Paper 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu Status appears 0 Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status Pause 2 Press the A or V key to select Paper Status 3 Press the OK key Paper Status appears Paper Status oad OK Cassette 1 1 4A Press the lt or gt key to switch the display of remaining paper amount among the main unit cassette optional Letter H Empty es cassette if installed and MP tray Plain
321. ult value for the binding edge of the finished copies 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm 01 Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 8 62 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default lt M Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select Detail Setting 6 Press the OK key The Detail Setting menu appears Detail Setting Cmd OK 2 in 1 layout Ay anw i Layout Border Line EXit 7 Press the A or V key to select Finish Binding 8 Press the OK key Finish Binding appears Finish Binding Mm 9 Press the A or V key to select fd Left Right or E Top 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu Image Quality Select the default value for image quality when File Format is selected Select the default value in the range from 1 Low High Comp high compression to 5 High Low Comp low compression Use the procedure below to select the default value for image quality 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05
322. und Default Screen Status lt gt OK lt gt OK 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears 3 Press the A or V key to select Default Screen 4 Press the OK key Default Screen appears 5 Press the A or V key to select the default screen 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu 8 5 Default Setting System Menu Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details The asterisk in the table is a default setting Tee wae Seer Key Off On Emit a sound when the Confirmation control panel are pressed Job Finish Off On Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed Ready Off On Emit a sound when the warm up is completed Warning Emit a sound when errors Occur Use the procedure below to set the buzzer sound for Key Confirmation for example 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm Language 3 Press the A or V key to select Sound Default Screen 4 Press the OK key Sound appears FAX Speaker FAX Monitor Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Buzzer
323. ust be entered correctly for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters Enter the signature The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E mail body It is often used for further identification of the machine The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters Domain Restriction Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected The maximum length of the domain name is 32 characters You can also specify E mail addresses 3 Click Submit 2 30 Preparation before Use Preparation for sending a document to a PC Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your computer Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation The details of the screens will vary in other versions of Windows NOTE Log on to Windows with administrator privileges Checking what to enter for Host Name Check the name of the destination computer Computer name domain and workgroup settings Computer name PC4050 Full computer name Computer description Workgroup abcdnet Windows activation Computer name domain and workgroup settings Computer name PC4050 Full computer name bednet com Computer description Domain abcdnet Windows activation Checking what to enter for Login User Name From the Start menu select Computer and then System Properties Check the computer name in the window that
324. ut the scanning side facedown in the center of Statement or A5 size scanning area NOTE For loading instructions refer to Loading Originals on page 2 54 3 Press the Program 1 Recalled The ID Card Copy function is recalled Program 1 4 Press the Start key Scanning begins Turn over the original on the platen and press the Start key 6 After scanning all originals press End Scan the Right Select key to start copying 3 5 Basic Operation Message Display The following examples explain the messages and icons used on the message display Ready to copy Ready to send i Dest T Sisal iveriinnnnneee 1 sided Duplex tT 4 oh ON oa BR Copier Screen Send Screen Reference number Indicates the current status of the machine Also displays the title of the current menu whenever the operation panel is being used Displays an icon that indicates the currently selected source of paper feed The meaning of each icon is as indicated below l The standard paper cassette is currently selected When this icon is displayed as there is no paper is the cassette The paper cassette for the optional paper feeder is currently selected Z When this icon is displayed as 7 71 or 4 there is no paper is the t cassette The MP Tray is currently selected When this icon is displayed as there is no paper is the MP Tray 3 Displays the size of the original s Disp
325. ution Select the default scanning resolution The options are 600x600dpi 400x400dpi U Fin Ultra Fine 300x300dpi 200x400dpi S Fin Super Fine 200x200dpi Fine 200x100dpi Norm Normal Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt gt select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears ai EXit Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default Mm Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Scan Resolution 6 Press the OK key Scan Resolution appears Scan Resolution lt m 200x400dpi S Fin 04 300x300dpi 400x400dpi U Fin 7 Press the A or V key to select 200x100dpi Norm 200x200dpi Fine 200x400dpi S Fin 300x300dpi 400x400dpi U Fin or 600x600dpi 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu 8 43 Default Setting System Menu Original Image Set the default original document type The available default settings are shown below ee Text Photo Text and photos together For photos taken with a camera for OCR Image quality suitable for OCR software Use the procedure belo
326. uts are fuzzy Images are skewed Cannot feed originals Paper often jams Printouts are wrinkled or curled Is the platen or the document Clean the platen or the document processor dirty processor Is the machine being used in Use in a location that has suitable very humid conditions humidity Are the originals placed When placing originals on the correctly platen align them with the slit glass When placing originals in the document processor align the original width guides securely before placing the originals Is the paper loaded Check the position of the paper correctly width guides Are the originals placed When placing originals in the correctly document processor align the original width guides securely before placing the originals Is the paper feed roller or the Wipe the paper feed roller or the separation pad dirty separation pad with a moistened cloth If the problem is not solved contact your Service Representative Replace the paper feed roller and separation pad Is the paper loaded Load the paper correctly 2 41 correctly Is the paper of the supported Remove the paper turn itover and 2 47 type Is it in good condition reload it Is the paper curled folded or Replace the paper with new paper 2 47 wrinkled Are there any loose scraps or Remove any jammed paper 10 13 jammed paper in the machine Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper
327. value are as follows a ae qd Left Right Left right binding Use the procedure below to select the default value for the binding edge of the original Sys Menu Count 0m System User Job Account 05 Common Settings Common Settings mMm 01 Language Default Screen Sound Exit Function Default mMm hl Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 1 8 61 In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Function Default Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Press the A or V key to select Detail Setting Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key The Detail Setting menu appears Detail Setting ai OK 2 in 1 layout Ay ane 1 Layout Border Line Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select Orig Binding 8 Press the OK key Orig Binding appears Orig Binding Sa OK 9 Press the A or V key to select Hf Left Right or Hi Top 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu Finish Binding Select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies when 1 sided gt gt 2 sided or 2 sided gt gt 2 sided is selected for Duplex Items available for the default value are as follows a ee a qd Left Right Left right binding Use the procedure below to select the defa
328. w Inbound Rule Wizard Name Soecty te name and deserenan of thes ste K and Port e e Name Desorption botona gt k C NOTE In Windows XP or Windows Vista follow the procedure below to set the port 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System and Security or Security Center and then Check Firewall Status or Windows Firewall If the User Account Control dialog box appears click the Continue button 2 39 Preparation before Use 2 Click the Exceptions tab and then the Add port button 3 Specify Add a Port settings Enter any name in Name example Scan to SMB This will be the name of the new port Enter 139 in Port Number Select TCP for Protocol 4 Click the OK button to close the Folder Options screen 2 40 Preparation before Use Loading Paper Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette and the multi purpose tray A paper feeder is also available as an option refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix 2 Before Loading Paper When you open a new package of paper fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack swelled Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the papers Finally align the papers on a level flat table If the paper is curled or folded
329. w to select the default quality setting for originals 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default Mm Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Original Image 6 Press the OK key Original Image appears Original Image pala OK 01 Text Photo Photo Text 7 Press the A or V key to select Text Photo Photo Text or for OCR 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu 8 44 Default Setting System Menu Density Set the default density The available default settings are shown below ee ee ee Manual Normal 0 Set to Normal 0 in the Manual density Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count e 0m select Common Settings system User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm 0l Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4
330. with the leading edge raised a few millimeters Label Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray For selecting labels use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure When printing onto labels you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected by the force applied in the machine The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used This composition of labels DP Adhesive layer may cause more problems Carrier sheet Top sheet The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels resulting in a serious failure Appendix 16 Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet When using such paper do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output Allowed Not allowed i Top sheet Carrier sheet Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g m Basis weight 104 to 151 g m overall paper weight Top sheet thickness 0 086 to 0 107 mm Overall paper thickness 0 115 to 0 145 mm Moisture content 4 to 6 comp
331. with the fax function installed Total Job Accounting Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit system Menu operation panel 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account Sys Menu Count gt 0 04 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name password with administrator privileges to log in and TT press Login the Right Select key Login Password NOTE The User Job Account menu appears Refer to Login Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 3 The User Job Account menu appears 11 31 User Job Account gt M User Login Set Job Account set Unknown ID Job EXit lt gt OK Job Account Set El Job Accounting Account Report Total Accounting EXit Total Accounting ol Printed Pages Scanned Pages FAX TX Pages EXit Copy Print Pages Copy 1 3 1234567 Total Accounting gt Printed Pages Scanned Pages Counter Reset Reset counter Are you sure Total JobAccounting Yes 10 11 Management Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears Press the A
332. ws PC follow the next steps to install the printing system driver The example shows you how to connect your printer to a Windows Vista PC NOTE In Windows operating systems you must be logged in with administrator rights to install the printing system driver You can use either Express Mode or Custom Mode to install the software Express Mode automatically detects connected printers and installs the required software Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port and select the software to be installed 1 Turn onthe computer and start up Windows If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays select Cancel 2 Insert the DVD ROM supplied with the printer into the optical drive of the PC In Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista the user account control window may appear Click Allow The installation program launches NOTE If the software install wizard does not launch automatically open the DVD ROM window in Windows Explorer and double click Setup exe 3 Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement Click Accept By using or installing the device drivers and software included on this CD ROM you agree to become bound by the terms and conditions of this license agreement Please open and read View License Agreement Copyright c 2010 4 Click Install software 2 16 Preparation before Use The software install wizard starts up Install Softwar
333. y Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu File Format Select the default file type to send the scanned originals The available default settings are shown below FileFormat Deseription Send files in PDF format TIFF Send files in TIFF format Send files in XPS format Send files in JPEG format NOTE Refer to page 5 10 for file formats Use the procedure below to select the default file format 8 53 Default Setting System Menu 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count V 0m select Common Settings System User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings mMm 0l Language Default Screen Sound Ee Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default Mm hl Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution EXit 5 Press the A or V key to select File Format 6 Press the OK key File Format appears File Format TIFF XPS 7 Press the A or V key to select PDF TIFF XPS or JPEG 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu File Separation Select the default file separation setting The available default settings are shown below 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0m select Common Set
334. y Density appears 0 2 Manual 6 Press the A or V key to select Auto or Manual If you select Manual press the OK key and then select the density on the next screen 7 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 13 Scan Resolution Sending Functions Select the fineness of scanning resolution The finer the scanning becomes the larger the number becomes the better the image quality becomes However better resolution also results in larger file size file capacity and longer scanning and sending times The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal 200x200dpi Fine 200x400dpi Super Fine 300x300dpi 400x400dpi Ultra Fine or 600x600dpi The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below Function Menu a OK Color Selection UO Original Size Oo Original Image O Exit Scan Resolution Mm 200x400dpi S Fin 04 300x300dpi 400x400dpi U Fin Press the Send key Place the original Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Scan Resolution Press the OK key Scan Resolution appears Press the A or V key to select the desired scan resolution Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen
335. y High Comp to Full Color Grayscale Black 5 High Quality Low Comp and White 1 Low Quality High Comp to Full Color Grayscale 5 High Quality Low Comp 1 Low Quality High Comp to Full Color Grayscale 5 High Quality Low Comp Sse ee ee NOTE You cannot select JPEG if Black and White is selected for the color mode Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Original Size Original Image Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select File Format Press the OK key File Format appears File Format TIFF XPS Detail 6 Press the A or V key to select the file format from PDF TIFF XPS or JPEG If Full Color or Grayscale has been selected for the color mode for scanning press Detail the Right Select key and select the image quality 7 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 5 10 Sending Functions 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu Original Image Select image quality suitable to the type of original The table below shows the quality options Text Photo Text and photos together Sending Functions For photos taken with a camera Only text no photos For documents to
336. y The Address Book list screen Addressbook lt 0 appears eeDesign amp Fiala NOTE If the destinations are not registered there is no list amp Maury in the Address Book 5 Press Menu the Right Select key Menu appears Detail Edit Delete Add Address 8 105 Add Address Contact Group Detail Contact Name Sally Entering Contact Name Detail Contact Name Sally Contact Name Sally Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the A or V key to select Add Address 7 Press the OK key Add Address appears 8 Press the A or V key to select Contact 9 Press the OK key This displays the screen for editing destinations NOTE If the maximum number of destinations has already been registered the screen will display Registered numbers exceeded and return to the Address Book 10 Enter each item and then press the OK key Registered is displayed and the screen returns to the Address Book list screen Refer to the descriptions below for how to enter each item 1 Press the lt or gt key to select Contact Name 2 Press Edit the Right Select key An entry screen appears 3 Enter the contact name If creating a new contact name the address number allocated to the destination is already entered 4 Press the OK key The contact name is registered 8 106 Default Setting System Menu Entering E mail Address 1 Press the lt or gt key to display E mail Address Det
337. y to other information items The items displayed are as follows Capacity Used Area Free Space When you press Remove the Left Select key a confirmation screen appears and you can remove the USB memory 4 Press the OK key The screen returns to the Status menu 7 20 8 Default Setting System Menu This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on the operation panel i COMIMON S CUING Sivcitcanne cup tore thant nad tecaneductisenteanemucaiest 8 2 COPY SCUING S vic certo tahenretecieie E 8 68 PONE SCIP OG Siicszescuctiaxnadseseaicusnvecctessenesstantaddceentecsnsaes 8 74 e Sending Settings ccc eeecceeeceeeeeeetaeeeseeeseeeeees 8 86 Document Box SettingS cccccccseesseesseeeeeeeseeeeees 8 88 e Printing Reports Sending Notice cccceceeeeee ees 8 93 e Adjustment Maintenance ccccccccccececseeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 98 e Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 8 105 e Restarting the System ccccccccsscesseeseeeseeeseeeees 8 119 NEWOK SC LUD naeun 8 120 JINGIWOFK SOCUNILY sessen A 8 139 e Interface Block Setting 0 0 ecccececeeeeeeeseeeeee eens 8 146 e Security Level Security Level setting 8 150 lt Optional FUNCIONS iiciniscctevecscrarcuaioeneeeamuaee 8 150 8 1 Default Setting System Menu Common Settings Common settings include e How to display the Sys
338. yed After confirming the content press the OK key The screen returns to the menu for the account To reset the counter press the A or V key to select Counter Reset Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key The counter is reset Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the account 11 34 Management Printing an Accounting Report Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered When Split is selected for Managing the Copier Printer Count ACCOUNT REPORT MFP Firmware Version For the count by paper size the report will be printed by size Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit system Menu operation panel Counter Q Sys Menu Count lt 0 User Job Account User Property 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account Common Settings Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and bff ft J press Login the Right Select key Login Password NOTE The User Job Account menu appears Refer to Login Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 3 The User Job Account menu appears 11 35
339. ype of characters you want to Report3i enter Each time you press Text the Right Select key the character type switches as follows ABC 123 Symbol ABC Symbols d HSK lt gt P fn T Text characters you can directly display the Symbols screen Appendix 6 Entering Characters After selecting a character type use the procedure below to enter characters Entering Alphabets and Numerals Referring to the table below press the key corresponding to the character you want to enter until it is displayed c Monarch Beats 3 D ABC Alphabetic Symbol abcABC2 D free 2 aee a Diae a ame onen 4 Numeric 4 JKL Alphabetic Symbol JkIJKLS 2 MNO Alphabetic Symbol mnoMNO6 D nme mee e D fme fe Numeric Alphabetic Symbol Switch between upper lowercase Numeric or decimal point symbols Alphabetic Symbol Numeric is entered when 123 is selected in the character type selection or is entered when only numerals are entered and no character type is selected Appendix 7 Characters associated with different keys can be entered consecutively To enter a character associated with the same key after another use cursor keys to move the cursor to the next entry position before entering it If you use cursor keys to move the cursor to an entry position apart from the end of the line and enter a character there spaces are automatically enter

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Palit GeForce® 8400GS Super+1GB NVIDIA GeForce 8400 GS 1GB  Manual de Instruções Transmissor O2 4100 PA  Developing Applicati..  Adam Equipment CFC SERIE  MICROgarde Controller User Guide  ConnectX® -2 Dual-Port VPI Mezzanine I/O Cards for Dell  COMANDO REMOTO 4-CANAIS ZMP257/4  取扱説明書｜屋外用 地上デジタル放送用ヘッドアンプ  Roboterpistole PG 1-R5 Quick - Ersatzteilliste  Kamo, l`idée du siècle  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file